JP7271457B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by screw members. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame and the screw member attached to the inside of the game island are disengaged, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are disengaged. If the game medium falls into the part, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium. There was a problem that it may be paid out to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from entering a payout portion.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a starting region;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect in accordance with the vibration effect;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiter provided so as to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion and having one end formed in a curved shape in the direction in which the game medium flows down;
with
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and the vibration effect can be executed based on entry of the game medium into the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. The screw member is configured to be able to stay on the restricting portion, and the screw member can drop out of the screw drop restricting portion from the portion formed in the curved shape,
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect executed according to the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different.
It is characterized by
The game machine of means a is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a starting region;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect in accordance with the vibration effect;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop restricting portion that is provided so as to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion and that is partly formed in a curved shape;
with
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and the vibration effect can be executed based on entry of the game medium into the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. The screw member is configured to be able to stay on the restriction portion, and the screw member can drop from the portion formed in the curved shape,
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect executed according to the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different.
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIG. 11). , FIGS. 12 and 27),
moreover,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
As the vibration effects for vibrating the operating means, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) (such as driving the vibration motor 131) can be executed (for example, the vibration control data of the operation section effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used to perform the variable display effect in step S172. Production control CPU 120 for executing processing, etc.),
Light-emitting effect execution means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined by
A specific effect execution means (for example, based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A, notification of jackpot determination, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.),
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration performance execution means can execute the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of vibration performance in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05),
Vibration modes differ between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. In addition, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the execution of the vibration presentation.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in game machines, there has been a technique of providing a vibrating means in a ball shooting handle, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-38019. However, in such a gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in improving the excitement of the presentation by vibration, and in view of this point, provision of a gaming machine that enhances the entertainment of the game when executing the presentation by vibration is desired. ing.

The game machine of means 2 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
As the vibration effects for vibrating the operating means, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) (such as driving the vibration motor 131) can be executed (for example, the vibration control data of the operation section effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used to perform the variable display effect in step S172. Production control CPU 120 for executing processing, etc.),
Light-emitting effect executing means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing a light-emitting effect (e.g., light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light-emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined by
A specific effect executing means (for example, based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A, notification of jackpot determination, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game Effect control CPU 120 etc.) that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the operation part effect pattern, etc.),
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration performance execution means can execute the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of vibration performance in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05),
The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view along II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 21. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view along PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along QQ in FIG. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21; FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21; (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper when the ball stopper is in the second state. FIG. 10D is a UU cross-sectional view of FIG. 1C, showing a retained state of the screw member; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage formation part which shows the movement condition of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2 in connection with the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a lower side of the specific electronic component 1 is a perspective view from . It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of stop design decision processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding a setting suggestion effect execution determination table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the execution example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine according to the characteristic portion 10SH. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH; It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of vibration production|presentation, and an example of a big-hit reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production|presentation, and a visual guidance production|presentation, and a production|presentation period. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of vibration production|presentation and visual guidance production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a rendering device relating to characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK; It is a figure which shows the example of a setting in the case of performing an operation part production|presentation pattern and specific interlocking production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the setting content of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the production|presentation by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous production|presentation pattern. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production|presentation control pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of timings at which operation section effects can be executed; It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of control of operation part production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the production|presentation which makes a game effect lamp light. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the production|presentation period which can perform specific interlocking production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example in case reach production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of music reproduction execution.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover portion of the third cover body 330) provided to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion 334),
The cover restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover from falling onto the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion, and a state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped onto the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device) of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) 200) are provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to drop outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion. have (L11>L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole, so that the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion will not be mixed in the delivery portion. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined hole that is the largest among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion. .

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330, and There is an uncovered area (e.g., uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334 of
At least some of the plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A and 12A are mounted using screw members). The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw member. See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first substrate has a smaller number of wirings to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path forming portion 202). While the number of cables C that can be connected to is set to the first number (for example, 20), the second Each signal line is also connected to the substrate, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with a screw member. It is possible to prevent falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the mounting frame of the external output board can be utilized to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) Special restricting portions (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict dropping into the forming portion (Fig. 22(C), Figs. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The special restricting portion moves the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retention portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
the special retention portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member;
The depth of the recess is the depth to which a portion of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (see FIG. 15, Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The specific part (for example, the ball stopping member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202) can flow down; It can be changed to a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the standing position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. It is possible to change to a second state in which it is possible to contact the game ball and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down).) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) provided with a retention portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) that allows screw members dropped onto the cover portion to be retained on the cover portion ( For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided with the specific portion different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The second cover portion (for example, cover portion 334 of third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, flange portion F) (see FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage formation portion falls outside the guide passage formation portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the threaded member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are provided to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 22,
Screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to positions above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, the upper portion of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and FIG. 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to bounce and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guide passage forming portion from the lower end (Fig. 29 ( A) See)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided so as to cross the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, the concave portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1). (see FIG. 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from a player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), a guide rail 2b, etc., and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the board. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y), special symbols (also called special symbols) as special identification information of a plurality of types are variably displayed (also called a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 . A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. Also, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including general winning holes is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is provided an out port (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the peripheral portion of the game area Y. It is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area Y by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device ( A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) for storage is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a payout port through which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area Y by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start winning has occurred) If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), information terminal board, launch control board, power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3), etc. are arranged on the back of pachinko game machine 1. there is

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random value for special figure display result determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, etc. , respectively, and stored (stored) at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the special figure display result Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for judgment, whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special pattern and the production pattern is a "jackpot" is determined (predetermined) before the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. Symbol normal processing is executed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the big win display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 5 to 7, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and a left side of the game machine frame 3. A game hall having a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 supporting the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable about the left side thereof. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside game islands (not shown). ), forming a ball tank forming portion 201 that forms a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming portion 201, and forming a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming portion 202 and a first passage forming body 203 extending in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishing device 150 has a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation route of the game island, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. a sprocket (not shown) capable of driving the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game balls sent out by the sprocket enter the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the drive source rotates the sprocket and the game balls are sent out by a predetermined number to the ball tank forming part 201. It is designed to be supplied to In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guide path forming portion 204 that forms a second guide path that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide path forming portion 202 downward, and a game guided by the second guide path forming portion 204 A payout device 200 constituting a payout section capable of putting out balls, and a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, forming a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player. Pachinko game for discharging the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball removing passage forming portion 206 that forms a ball removing passage leading to a discharge portion (not shown) provided on the lower back side of the machine 1 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. It extends vertically along the left side of the back surface of the .

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has therein a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the passage of the balls between the paying-out passage and the ball-removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200.例文帳に追加When the off state of the ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 displays a replenishment error, and by outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays the glass door frame 50. A game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined place on the front face is illuminated in an error mode, so that notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the central portion of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side, a production device having a movable body 32, a board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is stored, a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a plate-shaped It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, a production device, electronic parts, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed therein by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. , are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or it is attached to the game board 2 . The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface. part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, a first passage formation body 203 and a second passage formation body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 are It protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3 . In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 on the upper back surface of the frame 3 for a game machine, so that the pachinko machine can be used for pachinko games. In a state in which the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 through the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. .

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and is provided with an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 thereon. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the upper side portion 3A. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is mounted on the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to be able to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing each into a plurality of formed screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C. A three-dimensional second projecting portion 225 projects rearward.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In addition, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 .

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

The first passage forming body 203 includes a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing into the screw holes. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 also serves as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. there is

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 8, the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 include a male threaded portion NS and a head portion NH. It is a flanged screw in which a flange part F as a locking part is integrally formed on the bearing surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the bearing surface and increasing the frictional force, it is difficult to loosen compared to the screw members N3 to N6. It is considered as a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 4 to 7 mm. 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer). may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage formation body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank formation portion 201, and the first guide passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the case of clogging of balls, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event that clogging occurs.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the ball flows from the first guide path forming portion 202 to the second guide path forming portion 204, so that the game ball is rectified. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( 27) is open.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishing device 150, etc., to the frame or the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they will roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming part 201 or the first screw member will roll. There is a possibility that they fall inside from the non-covered area 350 of the guide passage forming part 202 and mix into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. , or when the game machine frame 3 is opened or closed, the replenishment device 150 is likely to vibrate, so a screw member ( (not shown), or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 are loosened due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 very likely to fall.

Then, when the screw member drops into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game ball flows down, and finally enter the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, or the payout motor may be damaged due to the load caused by the ball clogging, or the screw member may be damaged by the player along with the game ball. There is a risk that the player will be paid out immediately, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 mixes with the dispensing device 200 and damages or breaks down the dispensing device 200, or the screw member is broken together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to suppress the payout to the player.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. It is a diagram. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), and (D) is a third cover member. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guiding passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a guidance passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guiding passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed by an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be stored. It is Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, The game ball naturally flows down toward the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 to the left.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 261. . A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front vertical wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, hole portions 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear vertical wall portion 203B ( See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A at the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to drop the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204 below. .

A meandering portion 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273 . By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and 203B lower portions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm). (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), as will be described later, the screw members N3 to Even if N6 enters the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 272. can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the .

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the threaded member, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C, the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B extends. A mounting portion 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a right side from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 (forming a ball tank). 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and an attachment A plurality of engaging portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable are mainly formed on the front side of the portion 311 and on the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner is configured such that the mounting portion 311 is attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 while the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 . By fitting the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 . In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball tank forming part 201 is moved from the game island (not shown). Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to pile up in the vertical direction, the game balls are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball pressing portion 313 when flowing down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side. It is designed to be

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed vertically through the cover portion 314 while being arranged in parallel rows. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1-N6 and N11-N16 mentioned above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the game ball P can move in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the second cover body 320 includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion 324 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B which are elastically deformable. In the close state, the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, so that the first passage forming body 203 Mounted on. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), and is sized to accommodate at least the externally threaded portion NS.

In addition, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, FIGS. 2, when the game ball P falls to the upper part of the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flowing direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-like cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface and mounted from above. A mounting portion 331 having a hole H15 formed therein and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. It is elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by inserting it. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a horizontally long U-shaped slit 337 is formed in plan view, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side is elastically deformable so as to swing vertically. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 inclined downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked up and down are guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled. (See Fig. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the concave portion 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG. When the game ball P falls on the upper part of 336, the game ball P is guided toward the flowing direction (left side).

In addition, since the longitudinal dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ˜N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a connected left wall portion 341C, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 16 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage formation body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage formation portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover portion 324 is arranged to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are covered with the cover portion 324. While flowing down, it is leveled, and finally it is made possible to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. - 特許庁In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right. is located in the standing position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204; The part 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide path formation part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path formation part 204 (or difficult), that is, the ball-stopped state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 to the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage formation portion 204, so that the game inside the second guide passage formation portion 204 in this state It is possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened and consists of a front wall portion 341A, a rear wall portion 341B, and a left wall portion 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retaining portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 with reference to FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachable on the back. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming portion 202, but the number of lines is less than the first number. It is set to the number (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). When the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown). Cable C comes to be held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. there is

The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 . Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

On the inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 prevent the terminal substrate 210 from moving forward. a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted; have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is elastically locked by the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235, thereby mounting the board. It is attached to the frame 211 . That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Mounted.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, during wiring work for connecting a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, an operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C can be operated. need to operate. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection by a game hall clerk or the like, the cable C hanging down from the upper part of the game island is attached to the outer frame. It may be pulled around in front of 60 and tension may be applied to the connection. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off. ing.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation portions 233 arranged side by side as described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 26 shows (A) the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper in the second state. (D) is a UU cross-sectional view of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1 to N1 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided on the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. N2 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are mounted.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low. .

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls upward, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12 and N15 receive and store the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island and form a ball tank on which the load of many game balls is applied. Vibrations and impacts are likely to occur due to being arranged around the portion 201, so a screw member with a flange is used, which has a large contact area with the attached portion and is less prone to loosening.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, at the upper surface opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. , the game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150 from the circulation path above the game islands are received and stored in the ball tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-like first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is smaller than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1). It is almost impossible for the screw member to be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. is also long (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is Since the screw member N15 is inclined downward toward the back side, the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21A, screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the substrate A screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, A threaded member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front from the rear side. In addition, the second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so the pachinko game machine 20, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened due to vibrations or shocks generated in 1 and fall off rearward, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a recessed groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head portion NH when mounting the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3 is formed in a straight line toward the rear. has been extended to The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly slanted downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls out backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). In addition, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in the region other than the concave groove 227. In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS. In many cases, the screw member N3 is tilted in a state in which two points with the tip are in contact (see FIG. 22(A)), so that the tilted screw member N3 as shown in FIG. Occasionally, the head NH swings around the tip of the male threaded portion NS and changes direction. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly backward, or the head may move backward. The NH may also move to turn left or right by rotating its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves backward and bends to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bent rearward to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility of falling onto the cover portion 314 of 310 . As shown in FIG. 22A, when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male threaded portion NS falls. Although it is inserted into any one of the long holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is retained on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 by being locked without falling off. will do. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. It is likely to fall on horizontal wall 264 of body 203 . As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the threaded member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the threaded member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the grooves 326A to 326C. A portion of the head NH is accommodated in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, so that the head portion NH stays on the cover portion 324 without falling from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the concave grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3 from falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

In addition, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the horizontal wall portion 264 Stay in a state of leaning to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the liquid is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. As shown in FIG. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N3 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). More specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B. A recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by 225A, the standing wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23B, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 . That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, when the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves backward when it bends to the right, moves backward linearly, and moves backward. As shown in FIG. 24, in any of the cases where the board is turned to the right, it falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and stays in the concave portion 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or stays in the substrate mounting frame. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between 211 and the standing wall portion 203B, the head portion NH may be retained by being locked without falling off. That is, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. A special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is constructed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, the plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). C may also prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202. This constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the threaded member N4 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward so as to bend to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 203 is removed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202. 310 , an uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330 , which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330 , to the first guide passage forming portion 202 . to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side as the game ball P flows down, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and bends to the left, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the concave portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By dropping, it is accommodated and stays in the concave portion 336 without dropping from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the recessed portion 336 restricts the screw member N4 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202, which has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. constitutes a predetermined limit part of

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move linearly rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). There is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position in the vicinity of the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower inclined side, and Left side) is restricted to stay on the cover portion 334 .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. , the left wall portion 341C, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned so as to cross the passage in an upright state, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protruding wall. Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334. FIG.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may drop backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of causing the screw member N6 dropped onto the cover portion 334 to stay in the cover portion 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the threaded member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the mounting member 223 to the front and right side, and is positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged right behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it will drop onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202, There is a high possibility of dropping from the upper wall portion 225</b>A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

The screw member N16 is attached to an attachment hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 is loosened by vibration or impact and falls out backward, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. .

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc. are loosened due to vibrations and impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, impacts, opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, etc., the cover When it falls on the parts 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave part 336 and the ball stop member 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming part 202, Since there is a high possibility that the screws will remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to prevent the member from moving and mixing into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) end portions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves leftward, can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 , on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 , the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered with the cover portions 314 , 324 and 334 , but the sphere tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills out and gets on the cover parts 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the space is also narrow, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming portion 202 .

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has landed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also the game ball P can be retained in the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or it comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it either flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

In addition, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, The front-rear dimension L22B is larger than the front-rear dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration, impact, etc., and the non-covered portions provided between the cover portions 324 and 334 move. When it falls from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, it falls from the uncovered region 350 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. Even if the game ball P falls directly inside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. As a result, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the dispensing device 200 because it falls from one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Mixing can be suppressed.

A plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B which are formed close to each other and the hole 271A which is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked up and down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A in the vicinity of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which ball pressure is applied.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. Entry into the cover body 220 through the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is provided with a screw member. can be suppressed from falling, and it is suppressed that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

In addition, the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be preferably transferred from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is are stacked vertically, the screw member is often located above the game ball, but the hole portion 271H is arranged downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, , Since the game ball is arranged in a position where the game ball is rectified vertically, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is uncovered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the above-described Even if the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22C, 23A, 23B, and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are moved toward the first guide passage forming portion. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below screw members N3 to N6 attached to attachment holes H3 to H6 as attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but not retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, 334. , the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which the screw members N3 to N6 partially protrude when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, 243 can be easily taken out.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only does it block (or hinder), but it is a retention part that can be retained outside the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member can be found when a store clerk or the like at the game parlor conducts an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has the rotating portion 341 positioned at the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviating upward from the slit 344, and the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 being guided to the second direction. A first state in which it is possible to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 is opened. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down), and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is in the first state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, the reason why the ball stopper member 340 is set to the second state is, as described above, when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the game parlor clerk or the like operates the pachinko game machine. 1, the ball stop member 340 is put in the first state, while the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall clerk or the like cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

In addition, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as looseness preventing portions. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the game machine frame 3 are arranged so as to fall outside the first guide path formation part 202 even if they are detached from the game machine frame 3. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball. Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming part 202 come off, they will fall outside the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed into

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the periphery of the pachinko game machine 1 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (the number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200 . Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and vibrations are less likely to occur, so loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH with a small diameter that does not have a flange portion F. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispenser 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide passage forming portion 202 on the game board 2 detachable from the frame 3 for the game machine, the fallen screw member is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped on the upper wall portion 220H from jumping and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Also, although not shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and drop onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200 side, thereby preventing the screw members falling on the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the production device having a movable body, and the production control board 12, so that the drive source of these is generated. A plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). It is preferably of a size that does not allow NH to be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H of the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is Preferably, it is formed at least at positions not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H, or formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and FIG. 29B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is the first ball tank forming portion extending to the left side so as to incline downward. It has a guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to partially cover the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end. In the above, the configuration in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of Modification 1 Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover portion 360 do not remain on the cover portion 360 when moving toward the left end side, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 Since the screw member N directly falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the cover portion 360 in which a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed in the upper surface thereof, a second A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the 1 guide passage forming portion 202 .

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, screw members N1 to 6 and N11 to 16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks that make up the game island, and various devices (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) and the like have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during maintenance at the place can be targeted, but at least they have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing game media, the sphere tank forming portion 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage portion can store game balls, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 like the ball tank-forming portion 201 described above. It does not have to be long, and the front-to-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls by members other than sprockets.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B serve as the guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. Although the configuration in which the groove-shaped first guide passage forming portion 202 is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and the shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the form in which the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally formed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling them with screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw member may enter through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side. In addition, when a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204, or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restricting portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispenser 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the embodiments in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that allow the thread to be inserted, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as the recesses are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member A fall restriction part (drop obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and a movement restriction part (movement obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limit portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 is Not only those that make it impossible to fall, but also those that make it difficult to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting portions are provided in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting movement. It should be noted that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement to the dispensing device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, or the like. However, it is preferable to provide them at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, the corners between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which are not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the dispensing device 200 for the screw member. If the movement to the side can be restricted, the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 side is not necessarily disabled, and the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted, inhibited) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage restricts the downflow of the game ball, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the game hall clerk or the like opens the game machine frame 3 to form the ball tank forming part 201 on the back or the first guide passage. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member remains in the first guide passage forming portion 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easier for the store clerk or the like to identify that the ball clogging was caused by the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes may not be capable of dropping the screw member. Moreover, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the production control board 12 are applied as the first board attached to the lower position than the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. Other substrates such as relay substrates may also be targeted.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , other substrates such as a relay substrate may be used as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are exemplified by the form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are accommodated are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without interposing the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are configured such that the board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is accommodated are screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the game board 2 by an attachment method, using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members, that is, Although a form in which the board mounting frame 211 is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may include attachment means, adhesion means using an adhesive or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restricting portion for making the first guiding passage forming portion 202 of the screw member, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the fall of, a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, , a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can drop out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, or the like. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a magnet capable of adhering the screw member. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

In other words, the special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the portion that disables the dropping of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, Any material can be used as long as it makes it difficult to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in which the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc., are provided as the special restricting portion is in the vicinity of the front standing wall portion 203B. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least it is provided in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B as long as it is between the mounting portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first Although the form which applied the ball stop member 340 which can change to the 1st state which makes the game ball of the guidance passage formation part 202 flow down, and the 2nd state which makes it difficult or impossible to flow down was illustrated, this invention It is not limited to this, and any member provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction (lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 may restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specifying portion may be provided at the end portion of the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portions 314 and 324 as long as it is provided at the dispensing device 200 side end portion of one cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (a ball stop portion) may be integrally formed with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334 .

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH However, the present invention is not limited to this, instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head Also included are the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive agent, and the like. Moreover, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion to form the ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 are designed so as to fall outside the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the game machine frame 3. , the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 are mounted below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, it may be displaced in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If the screw member is attached at a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). good too.

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiments are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the pachinko game such as game islands. Although the embodiment of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw member is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferably formed in a size and shape that allow (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a form for implementing a gaming machine in the characterizing part 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko game machine or a slot machine installed in a game hall or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. Equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board. is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage of the door, and detection switches for detecting door opening, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as indicators, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. , an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that operate movable parts used in the game, such as reels and variable winning devices.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer transmits output data to the output circuit, thereby controlling the output components according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is through a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and are connected to a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus. The configuration may be such that the output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has electronic components mounted on one surface and no electronic components mounted on the other surface, and has a configuration in which the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which no electronic component is mounted and terminals of the electronic component are soldered is called a soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are configured with conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger proportion than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, and on the other hand, as shown in FIG. , more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are arranged than wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the wiring pattern distance is longer than the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. is avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes. One wiring pattern of the branch destination is detoured, and the one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern do not cross each other on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, there is a large percentage of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

30-4, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components having a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape and provided with a recessed notch on one of the short sides, and on the surface The model number is printed so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right. 30-4, the notch faces right and the model number is printed from right to left. It is possible to specify whether the circuit is present or whether it is an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus, input circuits, output circuits, and other electronic components are connected to a wiring pattern formed so as to branch out to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. connected by

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the horizontal direction through the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the horizontal direction. It is connected to a data bus on the surface, branches to a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at a position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less likely to be affected by noise from the electronic components. Since the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole is used for connection, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from the electronic components during this period is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is half the length corresponding to the bus clock, it may reflect off the surface of the substrate and cause strong resonance. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not half the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be installed, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock, which is the maximum frequency assumed among them. The length of the antenna is shorter than the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance, and the length of the antenna is less than half the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock that has the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming a data bus are arranged in an oblique right direction or an oblique left direction. They are connected across wiring patterns extending in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-5, through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 30-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns are used for mounting. Wiring patterns on the surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 30-6) are branched, and oblique wiring patterns that connect the divided horizontal wiring patterns to each other. are used to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of In this configuration, the horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same soldering surface. In other words, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so that the horizontal wiring pattern length is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. , the wiring patterns forming the data bus can be branched without intersecting on the same plane.

Figure 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-8 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area;

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-7, a wiring pattern that transmits a low voltage (Vcc (+5 V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. Electronic components (low-voltage components) are mounted on the left area where the first ground area is formed, and ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic parts (high voltage parts) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. It is mounted on the right area where two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, current is prevented from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap each other. Since the insulating region that separates the ground regions and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Mutual interference is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, FIG. 30-11 is a connector formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in the board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. In the wiring from the game control board, there are a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal that changes the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the probability of the lottery, and a signal that changes the set value. Wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the degree of advantage in the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply wiring as a supply line for

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder side, that is, the side opposite to the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface passes through the through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals, and the wiring on the mounting surface passes through. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and 30-12(B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. there is The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is short-circuited from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case. Fraudulent acts such as disconnection are prevented.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the area covered by the covering portion includes wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from the periphery of the portions where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor through the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor A line branched between is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the soldered surface and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface;

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the soldering surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. , are formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 30-14, consists only of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to detour the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside can be reduced. This prevents the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power. In the region corresponding to , the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few crossing points. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is located in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side. For example, a wiring pattern that transmits a signal related to the player's profit is closer to the mounting surface than a wiring pattern that transmits a signal that is not directly related to the player's history, such as a signal for controlling output parts. In the corresponding area, the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few crossing points, so that the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be used for transmission. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern, through which the signal related to the profit of the player is transmitted from the wiring pattern, is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that gives the operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A place where a wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects a wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than a wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By adopting a configuration in which the noise is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side and transmitting signals of relatively high importance is minimized. suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Mounted to be positioned. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is attached so that it is arranged on the device side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction (horizontal direction) is higher than that of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, design such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a quadrilateral consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment includes a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination, or to cross the one wiring pattern at the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane. can be formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed of a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each linear wiring pattern formed by division and extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns each composed of a straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) is formed. Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). Alternatively, wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data) It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted by

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of is connected is mounted, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage component) is characterized by being connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulator. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V) is transmitted) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage is A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended reverse flow of current through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high-voltage component), to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V)) is connected, is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in the current flowing through the wiring pattern that connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Even if the current difference between the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that an unintended reverse current flows through the ground. can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor. .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. is characterized by With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area and the Insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in areas corresponding to each other. and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) of the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery of the portions where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring related to the advantage of the game (signal for changing the setting value to a changeable state, changing the setting value (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since the wiring pattern is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case has a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the region covered by the covering portion. With such a configuration, wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the periphery of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). (Connectors CN1 to CN7) can be reliably prevented from fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the exposed portions.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of the present embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for is capable of holding the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is a game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, bypassing the electronic components. Since the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and the data stored in the memory means (RAM) can be prevented from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area provided with the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface is solid. A ground is formed. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more It is characterized in that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It goes without saying that

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game has been described. The configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, mainly the configuration different from the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. .

30-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

Also in the game control board in the second embodiment, similarly to the game control board in the first embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the direction of printing the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. there is

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIGS. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed to branch to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction. .

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the laterally separated input and output circuits via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, branch to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole, and connect to the input circuit or output circuit becomes. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components. are connected by wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components during this period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus is installed. The wiring pattern is formed in an area near the lower side of the game control board in the figure, that is, in an area near the other side opposite to the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic parts such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 for signal input/output with electronic parts outside the game control board. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which has relatively low importance among the input components used for game control (not triggering the lottery). A first input circuit that detects the input of a sensor or switch detection signal, etc.), an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (sensor or switch detection signal that triggers the lottery, an advantageous A second input circuit that detects input such as a detection signal that changes the set value that defines the speed, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the operation of the movable parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game, such as various indicators and LEDs, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer A second output circuit that outputs output signals to parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when playing the game for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit is implemented for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator for displaying performance.

A first output circuit, a first output circuit, a second output circuit, and a third output circuit among these input circuits and output circuits are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at multiple points, and is vertically mounted on the mounting surface. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side once through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through the through hole again at the position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the input circuit of the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus has a wiring pattern length from the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, an output signal is output to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game. has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. are connected to the data bus so that Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator is Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game Connected to a bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through-hole at the position Q in the drawing, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, changes according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device It is connected to an external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, by utilizing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side. and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It may be configured such that it is connected to terminals of two output circuits, and branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with such a configuration, it is desirable to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through-holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, so that the output corresponding to the progress of the game can be performed on the mounting surface side. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole once at the position of T in the figure, U in the figure It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of , and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, communicates with the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that is connected but detects input of an input signal from a second input component having higher importance than the first input component is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is designed to be connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intermediary, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is the game control microcomputer Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the input Data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit for outputting an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from a game control microcomputer; a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit comprising: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game outputs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the part, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part according to the progress from being affected.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment is configured such that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit. A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game. Also, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be short, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, a first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground area because it belongs to the low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, thereby preventing a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic parts are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through through holes is used to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. The wiring pattern is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device are branched, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the soldering surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer A second input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the 2 input components to the game control microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer It includes a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through-holes. and According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) than the other side. According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate area can be effectively utilized. .

In the game control board of this embodiment, a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display device to the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify display contents by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a , and a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and below the specified electronic component, as shown in FIGS. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the substrate and are used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, is provided. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component. An electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in Fig. 30-24(A), a normal through-hole is plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. It is a through hole that conducts at On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24(B), a specific through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in Fig. 30-24(A), since the inside of the through-hole is copper-plated, the solder inside the through-hole does not reach the mounting surface. Although it will flow up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in FIG. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent troubles such as the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder due to excessive rise to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, there is a risk that it will not be discovered. Also, if the model number is hidden in the model test, it will not be possible to specify the component configuration, and the test will not be approved. There is a risk that the terminal will not be able to receive the terminal, or that installation at the amusement arcade will not be approved because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the amusement arcade. Such a problem can be prevented by fixing with .

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of specific electronic components, problems arise even if the electrical connection is weakened when they are soldered to the specific through-holes. never On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A specific through-hole is formed in which a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components is fixed by inserting a terminal into the through-hole penetrating the surface and the soldering surface and soldering the through-hole and the terminal, The specific through-hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not allow electrical continuity between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, the specific through-holes are soldered to the specific through-holes for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2), so that the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, problems do not occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic parts are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. Terminals (connecting terminals) that propagate signals and power of components may be inserted and soldered. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of a terminal that propagates a signal or power of a specific electronic component with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, A substrate of this type has been proposed in which data is input/output using a single data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The substrate (game control substrate) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through-hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface on which the data bus is formed (solder surface) by a branched wiring pattern. Characterized by
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) facing the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more likely than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator. (microcomputer) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally alter the display content by arranging the

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
It is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the substrate so that the component directions are different.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is connected to the second electronic component that displays the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the output data can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through through holes. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). and a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected to the data bus formed on the second surface through the through-hole is used to output the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal corresponding to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control A second input circuit (second input circuit) to be transmitted to a microcomputer), and a third electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) (first output component, second output an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit for transmission to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game machine of (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the display corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed. can be prevented from affecting

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls circulated and lent out according to the player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game medium (for example, a game A storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) capable of storing a ball P), a payout portion (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and a top surface of which is open so that a game in the storage portion can be played. a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204) that forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage and a second guide passage) that guides the medium to the dispensing portion; and a cover portion (e.g., first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion, wherein the cover portion includes , Predetermined limiting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, concave Grooves 326A to 326C and a recess 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and the guide passage forming portion is provided with specific grooves for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the dispensing portion. A plurality of restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player. Then, as the vibration effect for vibrating the operation means, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, vibration control included in the variable display effect control pattern drive of the vibration motor 131 by data, etc.) can be executed (for example, the variable display of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) Effect control CPU 120 for executing medium effect processing, etc.), and light emission effect for causing the operation means to emit light according to the predetermined vibration effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern). ) can be executed light emitting effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect process during variable display of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203), and the game Specific effect execution means (for example, step AKS203 determined at step AKS203 Based on the variable display effect control pattern and the effect control CPU 120 etc. for executing the effect processing during variable display in step S172, and the advantageous state is obtained when the predetermined vibration effect is executed rather than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. The control ratio is high (for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the operation part production pattern, etc.), and depending on the light emission mode of the light emission production accompanying the predetermined vibration production and the timing at which the predetermined vibration production is executed, The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, the light emission color included in the operation part production pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation part production pattern, etc.), and the vibration production execution means Accordingly, the special vibration effect can be executed (for example, the execution of the vibration effect in the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 are different. Vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, etc.) game machines.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, the game interest can be improved by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the execution timing of the vibration performance.

In other words, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, and the light emitting mode in which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state at a high rate. Since it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the vibration performance is executed at the execution timing of the vibration performance and whether or not the special vibration performance is to be executed along with the execution of the specific performance, the amusement of the game can be improved. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to break down when installed in a game arcade and that easily attracts the interest of players.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a game machine that can prevent the screw member from falling and being mixed into the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion and that can improve the game interest, an advantageous state (for example, a big win) for the player is provided. A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that is controllable to a game state, etc., and includes operation means (e.g., stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and vibration that causes the operation means to vibrate. As effects, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). Vibration effect executing means (for example, vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 is used for effect control for executing the effect process during variable display in step S172 CPU 120, etc.), and light emission effect execution means capable of executing light emission effects (e.g., light emission of lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 in light emission colors included in the operation part effect pattern) for causing the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203), and a specific effect (for example, SP reach A ready-to-win effect, jackpot decision notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) can be executed (for example, based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, the variable display effect process of step S172 is performed. CPU 120 for effect control to be executed, etc.), and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, operation jackpot reliability according to part effect pattern etc.), the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state Differently (for example, the luminescence color included in the operation part production pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.), the vibration production execution means can execute the special vibration production along with the execution of the specific production. Yes (for example, execution of vibration effects in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), the vibration modes differ between the predetermined vibration effects and the special vibration effects (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.) is mentioned. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 31). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 31) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, there is provided a ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls to the first and second big prize openings (attackers). Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls won by winning the 2nd starting prize mouth (electric chew) and the number of prize balls by winning the 1st big prize mouth and the 2nd big prize mouth (attacker) account for the total number of prize balls. percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

Even during the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed for informing the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. In addition, even during the small winning game state, the effect during the small winning to report the small winning game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is the small winning game state or the big winning game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have it.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal drawing hold display 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal is turned off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turned on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 .

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is established in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by the operation of the staff of the game arcade, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flow chart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 37 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 37 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, it is determined so that the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state will be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, the interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small-hit mid-performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end performance. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic part regarding setting suggestion effect)
Characteristic portions relating to setting suggestion effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below. In this characteristic portion, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect that suggests the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 40-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination processing makes it possible to decide the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggesting effect.

After the announcement effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various production executions. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result of the notice effect determination process in step S202. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the notice production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined by step S203, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initialization of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of RAM122 A value is set (step S204). Also, a setting is made to start changing the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, a pending display update setting at the start of variable display is set (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased (digested), and other pending numbers "2" to The pending display in the display portion corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 40-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach performance of super reach is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example.

When the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol for non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. During non-reach, the variable display result is "losing". The normal reach includes a case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a case where the variable display result is "loss". In the non-ready-to-win state in which the variable display mode of the decoration design does not become the ready-to-win mode, the fixed decoration design of the non-ready-to-win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop design. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are different (mismatched) ornamental symbols. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach-losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reach-losing. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) ornamental symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "big hit", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win. The final stop symbols at the time of the big hit are determined to be the same (matching) decoration symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol for super-to-win is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "loss". At the time of super reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decoration pattern of the reach losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reaching losing. When the variable display result is "big win", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing", the same (matching) decorative design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R is It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decorative symbols constituting such a reach-losing combination or a big-hit combination are also called reach symbols. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-win patterns may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decoration pattern corresponding to the number may be only the effect image showing the number, or may be the effect image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win pattern is determined as one of a plurality of decorative patterns by referring to a ready-to-win pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the ready-to-win pattern. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the ready-to-win pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "losing", the determination rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the decision rate of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, number 3, number 4, number 5, and number 6 are the lowest. As the number becomes , the ratio of determining the decorative pattern increases, and the determining ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number of 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result is "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result when stop-displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is low. Thus, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, the variable display result becomes "big win", and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the lowest. In the ready-to-win pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win", the same number of determination values may be assigned to decorative patterns to be ready-to-win symbols. The number of determination values assigned to each decorative design to be a ready-to-win pattern may be different, or the number of determination values to be assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative design to be a ready-to-win design. Depending on the type of jackpot, the determination ratio of decorative symbols to be ready-to-win symbols may be different.

After step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by, for example, referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As the presence/absence of the setting suggesting effect, one of "no effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed, or "with effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is executed is determined.

Based on the result of determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is not to be executed, that is, "no effect" (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "there is an effect" (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, after determining the suggested setting pattern (step S228), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 40-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data constituting a determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 40-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of "with effect" for executing the setting suggesting effect is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". In the setting of such a determination ratio, when the setting suggesting performance is executed, the variable display result becomes ``big hit'' and the ratio of being controlled to the big winning game state becomes higher than when the setting suggesting performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big hit". .

FIG. 40-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggested contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

FIG. 40-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 pre-stores table data forming a determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 40-4(B) as a suggested setting pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern varies depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

When the setting suggesting performance using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. Something is certain. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is high, and when the setting suggesting performance is executed in the pattern RE-3, the set value is the highest. 6 is determined. In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A pattern display mode for suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 as well as suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as decoration patterns corresponding to the numbers is included. When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

The setting-suggestion effect can be executed in different effect modes according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern display color is not changed to copper because the pattern RE-1 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, as a pattern display mode when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the pattern display color is changed to copper color or not. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the pattern display color is not changed to gold because the pattern RE-3 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern. Thus, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is changed to gold as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

The setting suggesting effect is instead of changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of decorative light emitters such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, and the like. It may be one that changes the rendering mode by any rendering device, such as a combination of some or all. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for effect execution. It suffices if it can be executed when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to make the decision possible only when the result is a "big hit" and to make the decision impossible when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the current setting.

FIG. 40-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). If it is the notice effect period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step S243). If it is not the notice effect period (step S242; No), or after performing the control of step S243, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244). When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the ready-to-win performance after changing the symbol display color is executed after the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are made, and the pachinko game machine 1 is operated. Suggestions regarding settings can be made.

When it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; No), or after performing the control of step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When it is the change effect period (step S246; Yes), control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). If it is not a change effect period (step S246; No), after performing the control of step S247, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. In addition, the variable of the decorative pattern After performing control for executing an effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to different time lengths according to the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a portable terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as Networking Service and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the effect (unfavorable effect) that is often performed even in a disadvantageous situation does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effect is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect that is advantageous to the player, and to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the images including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game arcade side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a design confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S249). If no pattern confirmation command is received (step S249; No), the effect process during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the design confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop design (determined decoration design) which is the display result in the variable display of the decoration design (step S250). Subsequently, a certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step S251). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S252), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 40-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 40-6(A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the form of variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and ready-to-win is established. When the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the ready-to-win is established and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. FIG. 40-6(B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is advanced to the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decoration pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is displayed. FIG. 40-6(C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect as a setting suggestion effect is executed. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the stop-displayed ready-to-win pattern. In addition, by displaying an effect image announcing a message such as "Change the symbol display color!", a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made.

FIG. 40-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the pattern display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 40-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color changes to copper by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 40-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver by the pattern RE-2. FIG. 40-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains red, which is the normal display color. In this way, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is an advantageous set value, is low. In effect execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. In effect execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. In effect execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to gold, suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is fixed.

The setting suggesting effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by any desired effect such as a pseudo continuous effect or a pre-reading notice effect, in addition to a change effect in which the display color of the ready-to-win pattern can be changed, and the set value of the pachinko game machine 1. You may enable it to make a suggestion about. It may be an effect in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested after the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is made during execution of the variable display. In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is made and then the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is continued, and the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is continued and the pachinko game is performed. It may also include a case of suggesting a setting value of the gaming machine 1 . In the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion about the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion about the control of the big win game state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 is made. It may include a case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different decision ratios depending on whether or not the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

During execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the pachinko machine executes a big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and a big hit effect (such as a effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). A setting value of 1 may be suggested. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 10SH)
Next, the characterizing portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, as described above.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like.

The game machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The game machine according to the characteristic part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines one of the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started and the timing T2 when the reach is established, and the normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration performance can be executed at any one of the timing T3 during execution of the reach performance and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach performance.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 pushes the push button 31B regardless of whether it is timing T1 or timing T2 or timing T3 or timing T4. Vibration production can be executed in a mode in which the vibration time and the luminescent color are common.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The game machine related to the characteristic part 10SH includes a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of super reach.

The vibration effect executing means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect when the reach effect of super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 10SH includes display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various effect images.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the pending number display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 41-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH, showing the arrangement layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be illuminated by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. As shown in FIG. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. In addition, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to diversify the vibration mode of the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. A plurality of LEDs are built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 41-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L and 9R. The lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. It should be noted that the lighting/extinguishing control of the lamp may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a motor control board 130, for example. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. The display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131 in this way. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the effect control CPU 120 .

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 41-3 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 41-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). A variation pattern and a display result are transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display and specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Lottery here refers to a determination method based on random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121 . As the random number value, one of random numbers for effect updated by the random number circuit 124 or random number update process for effect is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is a effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that does not interlock with the notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration effect, and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed, based on a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win becomes higher than when the vibration performance is not executed, and when the vibration performance is executed, the reliability of the big win depends on the execution pattern of the vibration performance. is different, the determination value to be compared with the random value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when the vibration performance is executed.

Here, the reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (the probability that the effect A will be executed when the display result is a “big hit”)×(the probability that the display result will be a “big hit”)/{(display result Probability that production A will be executed when is a "jackpot") x (Probability that the display result will be a "jackpot") + (Probability that production A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is displayed when the display result is "big win" so that the reliability of the big win corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It is sufficient if the probability of execution and the probability of execution of the vibration effect of each execution pattern when the display result is not a "big win" are defined.

(Details of vibration production and reliability of jackpot)
FIG. 41-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, according to the combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, executes patterns SE1 to A plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10 can be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, when executing the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Also, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is, after the timing T1 and the timing T2, the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of reach effect of super reach. Vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings. That is, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win when executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 when the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is being executed. Further, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration performance at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of normal reach when executing the vibration performance at timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration production of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration production at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach.

According to such a configuration, since the vibrating effect may be executed while the ready-to-win effect of the super reach is being executed, it is possible to improve the amusement.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach, or the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed. , irrespective of whether it is the timing T4 or not, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B and a vibrating effect in which the is illuminated in red. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration productions of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration productions in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. is. In addition, the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration productions of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration productions in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration production can be executed. The production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration production of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration production in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and vibrates for 3 seconds more than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. The reliability of the big hit is higher when the vibration performance is executed in which the push button 31B emits red light. Further, in this embodiment, the reliability of the vibrating effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". to be reported deterministically.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, attention can be paid to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and is pushed When the vibration effect of making the button 31B emit red light is executed, the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same mode, it is better to execute it at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started than when it is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach. Highly reliable. Further, even if the vibration effect of the same mode is executed, it is executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, rather than at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. , The reliability of the jackpot is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, when the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode when the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1, the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win is performed instead of the ready-to-reach effect of the normal reach at the time T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration presentation at timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibrating performance is not actually executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-reach is heightened. be able to.

Incidentally, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach should be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win productions of normal reach, and if the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win production of normal reach, the reliability of the big hit of vibration production that can be executed at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win production of normal reach is , it may be higher than the hit reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach executed at that time, or higher than the hit reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the normal reach.

Similarly, the reliability of the big hit of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the super-reach should be higher than the reliability of the super-ready-to-win. Further, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, and when the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the type of ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the big hit of vibrating performance to be executed at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win. The reliability should be higher than the big win reliability of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win being executed at that time, or higher than the big-hit reliability of any kind of ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of the super ready-to-win can be regarded as the chance-up effect. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Then, it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, not at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Then, when the vibration performance is actually not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established can be further heightened.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to intricately change the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect as the variable display of the decoration pattern progresses.

In addition, the probability of executing the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in rainbow colors is sufficiently low compared to the probability of executing the vibration effect of other modes. By stipulating, it is possible to heighten interest when it is definitely reported that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always illuminated.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and increase the chances of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the description of FIG. 41-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach reach effect and the super reach effect in this variable display. It is determined whether or not the vibration effect is to be executed at the timing T4 during execution or at any one of the timings (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach (step 10SHS3; Yes), effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is a effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by means of a random number and a lottery based on a table prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same rate regardless of which mode the current vibration effect is.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach or timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In addition, it is possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration performance is executed at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative patterns is started or timing T2 when ready-to-win is established, visual guidance performance is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the true display result may be derived and displayed after the display result of "missing" is displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the current variable display is started, when the visual guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, There is a possibility of causing a misunderstanding as if a relief effect was being executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, such misunderstanding can be prevented.

Also, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the state of variable display of decorative symbols has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established, it is possible to properly recognize that the state of variable display of the decoration pattern has become the predetermined ready-to-win state. .

Returning to the description of FIG. 41-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at one of the timing T3 during execution of the reach effect of normal reach and the timing T4 during execution of reach effect of super reach ( Step 10SHS3; No) or after executing the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not other effects such as ready-to-win effects are to be executed, and the mode of the effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, whether or not various effects such as advance notice effects are to be executed and the mode thereof are determined by lottery. At this time, by varying the decision ratio in the lottery according to the display result of this time, the fluctuation pattern of this time, etc., the reliability of the big win can be varied according to the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice performance or the like and its mode. Also, when the current pattern designates reach, it is determined to execute the reach effect designated by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to this fluctuation pattern as an initial value to the production control process timer, and the type and mode of production determined to be executed. is stored in a timer value storage area of RAM 122 in association with an execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the production by comparison with the timer value of the production control process timer. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specifying data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies to the display control unit 123 an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols leading to the mode specified by the current variation pattern and the determined final stop symbol (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of the decoration pattern. At this time, the display corresponding to the variable display may be updated.

Thereafter, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 10SHS8), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration production and gaze guidance production)
FIG. 41-5 is a diagram showing an example of execution timings and presentation periods of the vibration presentation and the line-of-sight guidance presentation. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started or the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. It is possible.

In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at one of the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect and the timing T4 during execution of the super reach effect. In that case, it is possible to execute the visual guidance effect before that.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment starts the visual guidance performance four seconds before the timing T3 when executing the visual guidance performance before executing the vibration performance at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach. , the vibration performance is started when the timing T3 comes. Similarly, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T4 during execution of the reach effect of the super reach. Performance is started, and vibration performance is started when timing T4 comes. The production period of the line-of-sight guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the visual guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 41-6 and 41-7 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this production operation example, an example of executing the vibration production at timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win production of super reach will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 41-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the ready-to-win effect of super-ready-to-win is started, the effect control CPU 120 reduces and displays the decoration pattern that was stop-displayed when the ready-to-win was established. In this example, as shown in FIG. 41-6(A), the "left" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5L is obtained by reducing the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L when the ready-to-win is established. , and a "right" ready-to-win decorative pattern 10SH5R that is reduced from the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established.

A small pattern display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R is provided at the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, variable display of small patterns is performed in synchronization with variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is also called a notification information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol as the notification information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol as the display result is displayed. derived.

In this manner, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decoration pattern is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern to the derivation of the fixed decoration pattern as the display result, the variable display of the small pattern is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small pattern disappears from the screen or is obstructed. It is not shielded by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small patterns that are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK are also called constant small patterns or small patterns for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, in a display mode that is partially or wholly common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that indicates a number in the same manner as a part that indicates a number in the decorative pattern, a plurality of identifiable An effect image showing the type of small symbol may be variably displayed as the notification information image. It should be noted that the small symbols may be displayed only when the decorative symbols are not displayed. For example, after the variable display of decorative patterns is displayed in the reach mode, the variable display of small patterns is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. may be displayed in the lower left corner of the

In addition, a special pattern, a decorative pattern, and a fourth pattern next to the normal pattern are provided, and the variable display of the fourth pattern may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern. The variable display of the fourth pattern is, for example, in a fourth pattern display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, and repeats display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, the display result of the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize when compared with the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol.

Also, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are, for example, as shown in FIG. are located at a distance. Therefore, the player who pays attention to the effect by the display on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to confirm the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbols progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether it is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. On the other hand, small patterns are variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, and by deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether the variable display is in progress, Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

In this example, a suspended display area 10SHH for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. , is displayed. Incidentally, when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed, the reservation display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

A pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 . In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the reserved display area 10SHH, the reserved number of variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed so as to be identifiable. The display mode is a mode displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect four seconds before the timing T4 during execution of the reach effect of super reach. The effect control CPU 120 executes, as the line-of-sight guidance effect, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual effect, for example.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 41-6(B). do.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer as shown in FIGS. 41-6(B) to (D). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer as shown in FIGS. 41-7(E) and (F). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. Light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 41-7(G), the effect control CPU 120 causes the hammer swung down by the character to hit the button image 10SHB at the timing T4, and the button image 10SHB to simulate a plurality of stars. The various images are changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 starts the vibration effect at the timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and is incorporated in the push button 31B. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line of sight guidance effect, as shown in FIG. 41-7(H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B by the vibration effect has passed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the game area in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 41-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a player who pays attention to the display effect on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B. It can be difficult to recognize whether On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be favorably recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

In addition, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the back side of the layer that always displays the small patterns and the display of the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 41-7(G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is always displayed on the back side of the small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , always has a lower priority than the small pattern.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 41-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the back side of the number of reservations displayed in the number of reservations display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the induction effect, has a lower priority than the display of the number of reservations.

On the other hand, the priority of the visual guidance effect display is set higher than the pending display, the active display, the background image, and the decoration pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying a line-of-sight guidance effect in a layer on the front side of a layer that displays a background image or a decorative pattern among a plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 41-6(B) to 41-7(G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are displays for the visual guidance effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

In this example, as shown in FIG. 41-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-win decoration symbol 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-win decoration symbol 10SH5R.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 41-6(D), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 41-6(G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the front side of the suspension display displayed in the suspension display area 10SHH, and the line of sight guidance effect It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the reserved display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 41-6(G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of , has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made conspicuous while always suitably ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 41-6(B) to 41-7(G), when the visual guidance effect is being executed, the Also, the display of small patterns and the number of pending items, which have high priority, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while always ensuring the visibility of the small pattern and the display of the number of reservations more preferably. .

(Modified example of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to the characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the processing of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 41-3, the determination ratio of presence/absence of visual guidance effect may be set according to which mode of vibration effect is to be executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration effect is a vibrating effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, or the push button 31B is held for 3 seconds. Depending on whether the vibration effect is a mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or the vibration effect is a mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. The presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be determined at different ratios. Here, when the vibrating effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect. Also, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution ratio of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect with the higher reliability of the big win by executing the visual guidance effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration effect interlocking with the advance notice effect. In this case, as the vibration effect interlocked with the notice effect, a plurality of types are available according to the combination of the interlocking notice effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. may be executable. The effect control CPU 120 can execute a character product announcement effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect interlocking with the highly reliable character object announcement effect. This vibration effect is a effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronism with the movement of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. Incidentally, in this case, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration production should be higher than the reliability of the big win of the interlocking character product announcement production. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as a chance-up effect in the character object announcement effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect interlocking with another highly reliable advance notice effect. This vibration effect is a effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the image displayed in the advance notice effect, and the push button 31B emits white light. In this case, the reliability of the vibration performance should be higher than the reliability of the announcement performance to be linked. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be a chance-up effect in the advance notice effect.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the finalized decoration pattern that becomes the jackpot combination is derived, the game balls pass through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passage gate or winning opening. By doing so, a big hit game state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect for notifying the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect interlocking with the round lottery effect. This vibration performance is a mode of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and is executed in the jackpot game state. It notifies that the upper limit number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as the vibration performance, when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to achieve a big hit. The upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the game state may be definitely notified that the number of rounds is the highest among the plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying the occurrence of an error is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect should have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably ensure the visibility of the error notification image even when the visual guidance effect is being executed when the error notification image is displayed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the visual guidance effect is executed and when the visual guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. You can improve your interest when you play. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , it is easy for the user to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be different between the timing before the reference timing and the timing after the reference timing with reference to a certain timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, which is the timing before the timing T2, based on the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established. , 3 seconds at timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach, which is the timing after timing T2, and timing T4 during execution of ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, which is the timing after timing T2. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing should be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation may differ. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and when it is vibrated with a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration presentation should be made higher than that when vibrating the push button 31B with the first strength. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win may be common between the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, in the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the second model pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort.

A vibrating effect may be executed as a pre-reading foretelling effect for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the vibration effect.

In addition to this, when the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is the first mode and the second mode. , the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution to be the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the anticipatory notice effect is a mode in which the vibration continues for a predetermined period of time, and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, Reliability levels of big wins are made different in variable display before execution to be the target of pre-reading notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration effect as the pre-reading preview effect.

Alternatively, when the vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is a plurality of vibration effects that can be executed as the notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. may be executed only at one of the timings of . For example, the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration performance as the foreseeing notice can be executed, the vibration performance is the foretelling performance for foretelling the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. has been executed.

At the timing at which the vibration performance as the advance notice effect which gives notice of the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution can be executed, when the vibration effect is executed as the foreseeing notice effect, the reliability of the big win in the variable display under execution is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the anticipation effect. For example, when it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed. is 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B is 1.5 seconds in the vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the notice performance for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display during execution is set to vibrate continuously for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration performance as the look-ahead notice performance. The vibration mode of is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, at the timing at which the vibration production as the advance notice production for notifying the reliability of the big hit in the variable display being executed can be executed, when the vibration production as the foreseeing advance notice production can be executed, any It is possible to easily recognize whether or not the vibration presentation has been executed.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, the performance is executed at a specific timing. Regarding the vibration performance, even if the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the mode of the vibration performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model are different, the jackpot is won. The reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emission mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the reliability of the big win is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the execution of the vibration performance at the specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the effect executed at that time, for example, when the visual guidance effect is not executed. For example, in the case of executing a notification effect for notifying that a ready-to-win situation has been established at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win situation is established, the vibrating effect is performed by vibrating the push button 31B during the period when the image of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is generated, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration presentation and the reliability of the big win, the vibration of the same execution pattern. As for the effect, only the lower limit of the reliability of the big win may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration performance is executed as a chance-up performance of another performance, the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance can be flexibly set in relation to the reliability of the big win of the other performance. While adjusting, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at timings different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, the CPU 120 for performance control temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination which is not a big-win combination after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes the ready-to-win mode, and then the reliability of the big win is higher than that of the ready-to-win mode. It is possible to execute an incendiary production to incite the development to the reach mode. After the fanning performance is executed, there are a case where the ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win is developed and a case where the display result becomes "lost" without developing into a ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win. In the case of developing into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win, the CPU 120 for performance control executes a success performance for informing that the ready-to-win mode with high reliability of big win is developed as a result of the performance of the performance of inciting performance. On the other hand, when the display result becomes ``lost'' without developing into a ready-to-win state with high reliability of big win, the performance control CPU 120 notifies that the ready-to-reach state with high reliability of big win is not developed as a result of the performance of the fanning performance. Execute the instigation failure performance. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful fanning effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the successful fanning effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the inciting success effect is executed.

The luminescent color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance executable at the timing of executing the fanning success performance is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of a plurality of types of execution patterns executable at other timings. The push button 31B in the presentation may have the same luminous color as the luminous color. According to such a configuration, when the inciting success effect is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be "lost" even if it develops into a ready-to-win mode with high reliability of the big win, but the reliability of the big win is excessively increased. You can prevent it from rising.

In addition, when the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the amusement at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to heighten expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to perform the vibration performance at other timings as well. You can improve your interest when you play.

When the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the execution pattern of the vibration performance and the reliability of the big win, the advantage to the player is obtained. Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type different from the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of different jackpot types, the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be "rainbow color". do. According to such a configuration, when the luminescent color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest degree of advantage. can be

If there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, the execution pattern in which the light emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow" may not be provided. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in the "rainbow color" in the vibration effect, it is possible to prevent the "big win" of the big win type having a low advantage for the player. It is possible to prevent the feeling of expectation for the vibration performance from being spoiled.

The performance control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B using an auditory performance effect as the visual direction guidance performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration production is being executed, and then gradually increases the volume of the specific sound effect from a small volume to a large volume as the visual guidance production. Output to change. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player who has difficulty in recognizing the line-of-sight guidance performance using the visual performance effect pay attention to the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

When the winning probability of the big win is changed according to the set value, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value can be used even in the same execution pattern of the vibration performance. The reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may be different from one time to another. For example, even in the vibration performance of the same execution pattern, when the set value is "6", the reliability of the big hit of the vibration performance of the execution pattern should be higher than when the set value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "big hit", it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is highly advantageous.

When the winning probability of the big win is changed according to the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration performance is changed between the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. may differ in vibration time and emission color. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the set value is one of "1" to "3" and when the set value is one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and the emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the high setting, which may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, is set by the vibration effect. Further, for example, the vibration time and the light emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation may be different between when the set value is an odd number and when the set value is an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not it is an even set value that may be the set value "6", which is the most advantageous set value for the player, by the vibration effect.

At the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. It may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the light is emitted. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win state is established, attention can be paid not only to the execution of the vibration presentation, but also to the mode when the vibration presentation is performed.

At the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. In the case where it is possible to execute the vibration effect in which the light is emitted, the vibration effect is executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the ready-to-win state is established. There may be In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T2 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration performance is not executed, it is possible not only to heighten the expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the ready-to-win is established, but also to increase the attention to the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T2. .

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of normal reach and timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In that case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. A specific combination of the execution pattern of the performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance at the timing T4 may deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is vibrated in rainbow colors. Even if the performance is not executed, not only can the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration performance at the timing T4 during the execution of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win be enhanced, but also the mode of the vibration performance at the timing T4 can be more focused. can be enhanced.

The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the mode of vibration performance for deterministically notifying that the display result will be a "big hit" are those that do not deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit". The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in 1 may be different. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the mode of vibrating the display result of a "big hit" is changed to the vibration time of the vibration mode of the mode not informing the display result of the "big hit". The vibration time is set to be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, while the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous in the mode of vibration performance that does not deterministically notify that the display result will be a "big hit", it will definitely notify that the display result will be a "big hit". In the vibration effect of the mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the vibration effect in the form of deterministically informing that the display result will be a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

When the vibrating effect is executed at the timing T3 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach or the timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-reach effect of super ready-to-win, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed without fail. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result will be a "big hit" due to the execution of the ready-to-win effect is favorably increased by favorably recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

A timing T3 during execution of a ready-to-win performance of a normal ready-to-win when a vibrating performance is to be executed at one of the timing T1 at which the variable display of decorative patterns is started and the timing T2 at which the ready-to-win is established; The vibrating effect may be executed at either timing T4 during execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. In that case, the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 are lower than the vibration duration and luminescence color of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation performed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is such that the reliability of the vibration performance executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 does not fall below the reliability of the vibration performance executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of the vibrating effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be restricted. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at time T3, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at time T4, limit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the big win reliability from being lowered when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display.

When the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance is executable, the mode of the vibration performance interlocking with the foretelling performance and the mode of the vibration performance not interlocking with the foretelling performance may be different. For example, in the vibration effect interlocked with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the music played in the interlocked advance notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character object announcement effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the effect sound when the character object moves. Further, for example, in the vibration effect interlocked with the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not interlocked with the advance notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed, it is possible to make it easy to recognize whether the vibration performance is linked to the advance notice performance or not linked to the notice performance. .

A present box presentation may be made executable. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the opened present box as shown in FIG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the visual guidance effect and the vibration effect due to the execution of the present box effect.

When it is possible to execute an operation effect for operating the push button 31B, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, The push button 31B may be illuminated. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect, the lighting mode for the vibration effect may be controlled so that the push button 31B emits red light continuously for three seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. . On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation presentation, the button operation switches the push button 31B between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (light off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. You may control so that it may become the lighting mode for a suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective. Note that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in order to notify that the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid during the lever operation valid period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the lighting mode for suggesting lever operation is made to emit light from the operation lever of the stick controller 31A during the valid period of lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting button operation.

For example, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player to set the volume of the effect to be executed, the type of music or background to be output, and the image display. Settings related to effects, such as brightness settings of the device 5 and brightness settings of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. It should be noted that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting is to be changed from the menu screen, or a different operation is performed corresponding to the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, when the special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lighted in order to notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a mode different from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration presentation and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation presentation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the setting regarding the effect can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player and that can execute a vibration effect in which an operation means that the player can operate vibrates (for example, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2019-051075).

In general, a player plays a game while looking at display means on which variable displays and various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operation means is out of sight of the player, there is a possibility that the player cannot recognize that the operation means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration presentation.

Therefore, in order to make the game means pay attention before the vibration effect is executed and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the game machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled by the player is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation, etc.), and a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates is capable of executing a vibration effect in which the player vibrates, etc.), and a line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the player's (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the advantageous state is controlled when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance is not executed), and the vibration performance executing means , at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing, the vibration effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display of the decoration pattern at the timing T1 and the second timing after the first timing). , a timing T2 at which the reach is established, a timing T3 after the timings T1 and T2, during which the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach is being executed, and a timing during the execution of the ready-to-reach performance of the super ready-to-win. (e.g., at any one of T4 and T4, the vibration effect can be executed), regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect is performed in a common manner. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is either timing T1 or T2, or either timing T3 or T4, regardless of (e.g., the vibrating effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and the light emitting color of the push button 31B are the same), the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, the production control CPU 120 does not execute the visual guidance production at the timing T1 and the timing T2, etc.), and can execute the visual guidance production before the vibration production is executed at the second timing (for example, , the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operation means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the game machine of the means 1, wherein the vibration effect execution means can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed (for example, effect control For example, the CPU 120 may be capable of executing the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect in the game machine of the means 1 or 2 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , being able to execute a reach effect of super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect executing means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , the vibrating effect can be executed when the reach effect of super reach is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed while the specific effect is being executed, the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means 4 relating to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the game machines of means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has an image display device 5 that displays various effect images. and the like), and the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of the predetermined information and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect image has lower priority than constant small patterns, pending number display, and various error notifications, and has higher priority than pending display, active display, background image, decorative pattern, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect stand out while suitably ensuring the visibility of the predetermined information when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 10SH is the game machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, wherein the vibration performance execution means is the vibration performance of the first mode and the advantageous state more than the first mode. (For example, the production control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds. and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed than when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. ), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second mode is more likely to be executed than the vibration effect of the first mode (for example, pachinko game In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and lighting the push button 31B in white. At the same time, the vibration effect of making the push button 31B emit red light is easier to execute, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the execution of the vibration effect of the second mode by executing the visual guidance effect.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

(Description of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 42-1 shows a configuration example of a rendering device relating to characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for presentation serving as a movable presentation device is provided in front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side overlapping the display screen of the image display device 5 . The movable body 32 may be connected to an operation motor via a link mechanism, for example. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be one whose position can be changed by power from, for example, an operating solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is configured using a decorative member, and has a configuration that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through structure so that the player can visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 . The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 . The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the game area in the gaming machine frame 3 .

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs incorporated in the operating rod (operating lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. Part or all of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be made of a translucent member. As a result, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated by lighting the lever lamp 9B1. Also, the push button 31B can be illuminated by turning on the button lamp 9B2.

For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally formed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated by driving the vibration motor 131. FIG. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or near the push button 31B, may be built in the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, or may be provided at the base position of the operation lever. A plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to diversify the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

In the pachinko game machine 1, as a suggestive performance suggesting that the variable display result becomes "big hit" at a predetermined rate and controlled to a big win game state, an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance can be executed. In the vibration effect included in the operation part effect, by driving the vibration motor 131, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern. In the light emission effect included in the operation part effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light along with the vibration effect by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In the light emitting effect included in the operation part effect, lighting of one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 causes one of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light along with the vibration effect. good too. For example, by turning on only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may emit light along with the vibration effect.

FIG. 42-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation part effect pattern used for executing an operation part effect. In this setting example, operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as a plurality of operation unit effect patterns. Emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and application are set for each operation part production pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation part effect. A vibration pattern corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates a vibration mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate in the vibration effect included in the operation part effect. The big win reliability corresponding to the operation part performance pattern indicates the rate of control to the big win game state with the variable display result becoming "big win" when the operation part performance corresponding to the operation part performance pattern is executed. The application corresponding to the operation part effect pattern indicates the timing at which the operation part effect is executed for each operation part effect pattern.

The operation part effect can be executed at a plurality of timings associated with the progress of the variable display, such as, for example, when the pre-variation starts, when the target variation starts, when the reach is established, when the reach develops, and when the winner is announced. The preliminary change start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display to be suggested by the operation unit presentation. The target variation start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit presentation. When the ready-to-win state is established, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display is in the ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win development time is a timing corresponding to the case where the developing effect is executed along with the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach. The development effect is a effect for notifying that the ready-to-reach effect of super reach is executed after the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach is executed (development of reach). The winning/failure notification fanning time is a timing corresponding to the fanning performance prior to the winning/failure reporting performance for informing whether or not the variable display result becomes a ``jackpot'' during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 42-2(A), a plurality of operating part effect patterns that can be used for executing operating part effects corresponding to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation part effect patterns can be used according to a plurality of timings at which the operation part effects can be executed.

When the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the reliability of big win is higher than when only the ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is executed and the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is not executed. Depending on whether or not the ready-to-win performance of super-reach is executed and the determined decoration pattern of the big-win combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether or not to be controlled to the big-win game state. As for the reach performance of the super reach, a plurality of reach performances including, for example, the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. The decision ratio when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the decision ratio when the variable display result is not "jackpot" are set so that the reliability of the jackpot is according to each reach production. Just do it. Using a random value for determining the variation pattern, depending on the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table, presence or absence of reach production, presence or absence of reach production of super reach, production mode in reach production, etc. It would be nice if it could be set.

Regardless of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as the ready-to-win effect, the operation part effect is executed at a predetermined rate depending on whether the variable display result is a "big hit" or not. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of An operation part effect that can be executed regardless of such a specific effect is also called a single operation part effect. On the other hand, there is a case where an effect is executed in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated or vibrated in association with the specific effect. The production by light emission or vibration associated with such a specific production is also called a specific interlocking production.

FIG. 42-2(B) shows a setting example when executing a specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect with a plurality of specific effects such as movable body operation, image display, music playback in the reach effect of SP reach A, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The emission color in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be made to emit light as part of the specific effect. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be vibrated as part of the specific effect. Thus, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as a part of the specific performance, the big win reliability is common to the specific performance, and the unique big win reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the special vibration effect that can be executed along with execution of the specific effect. The operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the light emission of the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect are included in the specific light emitting effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of the SP reach A may be, for example, about 40% of the jackpot reliability. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be a drawing effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type with the minimum number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the number of rounds is the second jackpot type with the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance related to the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control after the jackpot game state is finished, and the end conditions, or may be previously notified in the jackpot game state. A lottery effect relating to the presence or absence of a rank-up and the amount of increase in which the number of rounds is greater than the number of rounds may be used. As jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that has entered the V prize opening of the V prize attacker, when it is possible to control the probability variable state after the jackpot game state is over, whether or not the V prize attacker is opened and the opening time. , The number of times of opening, or depending on the termination conditions of the variable probability control, etc., it may be possible to execute a lottery effect related to the jackpot gaming state with different advantages. When it is possible to control from a small winning game state to a big winning game state based on the occurrence of V winning by the game ball entering the V winning attacker, whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or Depending on the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect related to the small win game state and the big win game state with different degrees of advantage.

Until the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, control is performed in a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released, the V by entering the game ball into the V winning attacker. During the period until a prize is won, the strong vibration monitoring state may be set, and the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be controlled so as not to vibrate. Then, when a V prize is generated, control may be performed to the weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which vibration errors are easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is more difficult to detect vibration errors than in the strong vibration monitoring state. During a period when there is a high possibility of fraud due to the generation of vibration by a player, control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of cheating due to the player generating vibration, control is performed to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, the control of the production control CPU 120, etc., displays the warning image, outputs the warning sound, turns on the warning lamp, outputs the warning signal, or a combination of some or all of these, It is sufficient if the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality can be executed. When a vibration error is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 may control the CPU 103 of the pachinko game machine 1 to stop the game. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor the vibration and suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the notification of the vibration error or the game stop state due to the inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 42-3 shows the setting contents of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. FIG. 42-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used for executing vibration effects included in the operation part effects. FIG. 42-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used for executing the special vibration effect included in the specific interlocked effect.

The vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the ON period and the OFF period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of starting the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light becomes white along with the vibration effect.

The vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. Also, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at timings different from the start of the preliminary variation and the start of the target variation. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes rainbow. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation part presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation part presentation that can be executed at a timing different from the target variation start time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes rainbow.

In the vibration pattern AKV11, the ON period vibration mode is matched with the effect AKR1 when the ready-to-win state is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation part effects that can be executed at a timing different from when the ready-to-win state is established. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In the vibration pattern AKV12, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period in accordance with the effect AKR2 when the ready-to-win state is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from when the ready-to-win state is established. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light along with the vibration effect becomes orange.

As the vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the ready-to-win state is established, the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the ready-to-win state is established and the effect by a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 executable when ready-to-win is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 executable when ready-to-win is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there is a case where the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the operation section presentation executed when the ready-to-win state is established and the operation section presentation executed at the time of the start of the preliminary fluctuation or the start of the target fluctuation. . In this way, when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, the vibration mode of the vibration effects is common, so that the increase in the control load of the effects and the control data may be prevented.

In the vibration pattern AKV21, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period according to the production AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the reach development time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light becomes white along with the vibration effect.

In the vibration pattern AKV22, it becomes a vibration mode of the on period in accordance with the production AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation section presentation that can be executed at a timing different from the reach development time. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32, the light emission color in the light emission effect in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light with the vibration effect becomes white.

As the vibration effect included in the operation part effect at the time of reach development, the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development and the effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed. In these cases, there is a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed when the reach develops and the operation part effect executed when the pre-variation starts or when the target change starts. . In this way, when the timings of executing the operation section effects are different, the vibration mode of the vibration effects is common, so that the control burden of the effects and the increase in the control data may be prevented.

The vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds or longer. For example, after the ON period continues for 1,500 milliseconds, the ON period continues until the player's action to operate the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is detected in the effective detection period. I wish I could. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed at the time of winning/failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation part effect that can be executed at a timing different from the timing of the success/failure notification. In the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41, the luminescence color in the light emission effect in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit light with the vibration effect becomes gold.

It should be noted that whether or not to provide an effective detection period when the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed may be changed according to the type of effect to be executed with the variable display, such as the type of ready-to-win effect. good. When providing an effective detection period, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are switched between gold light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds so that the light emission mode is for suggesting operation. may be controlled. If the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in gold for a period of time during which the operation lever or the push button 31B is vibrated, so that the light emission mode for vibration effect is performed. On the other hand, when providing an effective detection period, it is suggested to switch the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B between emitting (lighting) and non-emitting (turning off) a red color different from gold every 150 milliseconds. You may control so that it may become the light emission mode for. By executing a light emission effect in a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to confirm that the operation of operating the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set may be used to differentiate the priority of light emission control. For example, in the first lamp layer, as a lighting mode for suggesting normal operation, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are switched between red lighting (lighting) and non-lighting (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds. Set the lamp control data to In the second lamp layer, as a light emission mode for suggesting a special operation, lamp control data is set in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are continuously illuminated in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is performed rather than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Prioritize execution. As a result, the light emission mode for suggesting a special operation may be controlled so as to have a higher priority than the light emission mode for suggesting a normal operation.

A plurality of ready-to-win performances to be super ready-to-win may include a strong SP ready-to-win with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP ready-to-win with a relatively low big-hit reliability. In the ready-to-win effect of the strong SP reach, the hit/fail notification effect is executed after the action detection effect is executed by detecting the action of the player operating the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a strong SP reach is executed, it is turned on until the player's action to operate the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient that the vibration form continues for a period. In the ready-to-win effect of the weak SP reach, the win/fail notification effect is executed without executing the motion detection effect. When the vibrating effect corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of such a weak SP reach is executed, the vibrating mode according to the vibration pattern AKV31 may be set 1500 milliseconds or more before the win/fail notification effect. A case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is different between the operating part presentation when the ready-to-reach presentation of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation presentation when the ready-to-reach presentation of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. You may control to the vibration mode used as a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to switch between a period and an OFF period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the low SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. You may control to a vibration mode. A case may be provided in which the lighting mode of the lighting effect is different between the operating part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed and the operation effect when the weak SP reach effect is executed. For example, as a light emission effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in gold every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. It may be controlled so that the light emission mode is switched between (lighting) and non-lighting (extinguishing). On the other hand, as a light emission effect included in the operation part effect when the low SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The operation lever and the push button 31B may be controlled to emit gold light.

In the vibration pattern AKV41, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the movable body operation in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the vibration pattern AKV42, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the screen display in the SP reach A reach performance. In the vibration pattern AKV43, it becomes a vibration mode of the ON period interlocked with the music reproduction in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV44 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds or longer.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes blue as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach effect. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes gold as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the SP reach A reach effect. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect changes from blue through red to gold as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 is a special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance executed together with the notification of the confirmation of the big hit, and a special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2. There are cases and cases. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the notification of the confirmation of the big hit, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes rainbow with the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes white as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the light emission color in the specific light emitting effect becomes rainbow as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 42-4 shows an execution example of an effect by vibrating and lighting the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Here, a plurality of effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the emission color of the push button 31B. It should be noted that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B are in the normal light emission state, with the light emission brightness set to be low, and the color of light emitted. It suffices if the light is emitted so as to be white. Alternatively, in the normal light emission state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-light emission.

Effect execution example AKA01 is a case of executing a lighting effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit white light. In the case of executing the operation part presentation by any one of the operation part presentation patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emission color becomes white. The operation part effect pattern AKC01 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the preliminary variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. Both of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the time of reach development. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31 and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC01 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC11 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC31 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC32 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as the specific effect, the light emission color is white.

Effect execution example AKA02 is a case of executing a light emission effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit light in red. In the case of executing the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light emission color becomes red. The operation part effect pattern AKC02 can be used when the operation part effect is executed at the start of the advance variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 all have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC02 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part presentation by the operation part pattern AKC12 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the music reproduction of the SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period in which the light emitting color is red is included.

Effect execution example AKA03 is a case of executing a lighting effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit light in rainbow colors. In the case of executing the operation part presentation by either of the operation part presentation patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the light emission color becomes rainbow. The operation part effect pattern AKC03 can be used when the operation part effect is executed at the start of the preliminary variation. The operation part effect pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation part effect at the start of the target change. The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 all have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC03 includes the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC13 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV03. Also when executing the jackpot decision notification or the jackpot type lottery CH2 as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes rainbow.

Effect execution example AKA04 is a case of executing a light emitting effect in which the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit pink light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21, the light emission color becomes pink. The operation part effect pattern AKC21 can be used when the operation part effect is executed when the reach is developed. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC21 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit orange light. In the case of executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22, the light emission color becomes orange. The operation part effect pattern AKC22 can be used when the operation part effect is executed when the reach is developed. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC22 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case of executing a light emission effect in which the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B emit blue light. When the operation section effect is executed, the emission color never turns blue. When executing the movable body motion of SP reach A as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes blue. In addition, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period in which the light emission color is blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in gold. When executing the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. The operation part effect pattern AKC41 can be used when an operation part effect is executed at the time of winning/failure notification. The operation part performance by the operation part performance pattern AKC41 has a big hit reliability of 100%. The operation part production by the operation part production pattern AKC41 includes the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV31. When the image display of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the light emission color becomes gold. In addition, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as the specific effect, the effect period in which the luminous color is gold is included.

As described above, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the light emitting color of the push button 31B may differ or may be common depending on the execution timing of the operation section effect, the reliability of the big hit, and the vibration mode in the vibration effect. In addition to the light emission color, for example, the light emission time, the number of light emission (number of blinks), the light emission cycle (blink cycle), the light emission brightness, etc., can be used to determine the execution timing of the operation part production, the reliability of the jackpot, and the vibration in the vibration production. Depending on the mode, they may be different or common.

The operation part effect can be executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect or a continuous forewarning effect when it is executed at the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The pre-reading advance notice effect suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous advance notice effect continuously indicates whether or not the result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display to be suggested. A continuous advance notice effect can be executed using a continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special figure reserved memories at the time of starting winning. As the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the effect mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the special figure reservation memory number at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 42-5 shows a setting example of a continuous effect pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice effect. For the continuous effect pattern, for example, using a random number value for determining the continuous effect pattern, refer to the continuous effect pattern determination table according to the number of pending memories, and according to the winning determination result, the determined value that matches the random value is assigned. It may be determined by judging the determination result that is given.

FIG. 42-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "2". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD01, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous announcement effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD02, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous announcement effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD03, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD04, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous announcement effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD05, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD06, the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". A part production is executed.

FIG. 42-5(B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "3". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section effect is executed by one of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, and the remaining number of times is "0". When , an operation section effect is executed by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13.

FIG. 42-5(C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the reserved storage number is "4". In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any one of "1" to "3", the operation part effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is When it is "0", the operation part effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 42-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 39 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 42-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition for enabling the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the effect control command (starting entrance winning designation command, pending memory number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning has been received. If no command is received, it is determined that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. When there is a command reception, the content of the notification by the received command is specified, and for example, the result of judgment at the time of winning is specified as the content of notification by the judgment result command at the time of winning.

The determination result at the time of winning determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and whether or not the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern, using the game random numbers extracted at the start of the winning. , The result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. As the judgment result at the time of winning, for example, any one of the big win, determination of super reach at the time of loss, determination of reach at the time of loss, and general at the time of loss may be indicated. The determination result at the time of winning a big hit is a determination result corresponding to the case of being controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the case where the random number for determining the display result is within the big win determination range. Winning judgment result of super reach determination at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and corresponds to the case where the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach determination range at the time of loss This is the judgment result. Winning determination result of reach determination at the time of loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of loss is. If the judgment result at the time of general winning at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the jackpot game state, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the confirmation range of super reach nor within the confirmation range of reach at the time of loss is a determination result corresponding to

It suffices if the pre-reading notice condition can be satisfied when the result of determination at the time of winning is either a big hit or determination of super reach at the time of loss. In addition, if the judgment result at the time of winning this time is either a big hit or a super reach determination at the time of loss, and the judgment results at the time of winning up to the previous time corresponding to the pending memory are all general at the time of loss, the pre-reading notice condition can be established. In addition, in the case where the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect, has already been set to start, the pre-reading notice condition may be restricted so as not to be satisfied.

If the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of pre-reading notice, and referring to a pre-reading notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the result of determination at the time of winning, Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect may be determined as the presence or absence of the advance notice execution. At step AKS102, it is determined to be either "not executed" when the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed, or "executed" when the pre-reading notice effect is executed. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it is determined to be "executed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). At step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous effect pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous effect pattern, and referring to a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning judgment result, a continuous effect pattern can be generated. is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105, setting during pre-reading notice is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading notice in-progress flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control flag setting section, etc.) may be set to an ON state.

In such a pre-reading notice setting process, when the result of determination at the time of winning is either a big win or a super reach at the time of losing, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-reading notice execution in step AKS102 is possible. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence of a continuous effect pattern by step AKS105. When the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, even if it is decided to "execute" to execute the pre-reading notice effect by step AKS 102 at a higher rate than in the case where the judgment result at the time of winning is determination of super reach at the time of loss. good. In addition, in step AKS105, when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, the continuous effect pattern may be determined at a rate different from the case where the judgment result at the time of winning is determination of super reach at the time of loss. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute the continuous announcement effect, which is the prefetch announcement effect, based on the winning determination result, which is the prefetch determination result.

FIG. 42-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 39 as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 42-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents such as the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. You just have to decide. When the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are set to send the command at the start of the variation of the special symbol. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the performance control board 12 . The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. When the variable display content is "unprobability variable (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state is a time saving state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable probability state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols of the same even number symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", it is sufficient if a combination of fixed decorative symbols of the same odd-numbered symbols can be determined as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", a combination of fixed decoration symbols that will be a combination of reach loss as the final stop symbol is determined. When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is a non-reach losing combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining the combination of fixed decoration patterns, for example, numerical data that is a random number value for design determination is extracted, and according to the variable display content, by referring to a pattern determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. What is necessary is just to determine the stop design of the decoration design.

After determining the final stop pattern, etc., the operating section effect is determined (step AKS202). At step AKS202, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading announcement effect is being executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice flag is ON, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. When the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operating part effect pattern is determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous effect pattern. As for the continuous effect pattern, the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading notice in-progress flag should be cleared and turned off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the pre-reading announcement effect is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation part effect and the operation part effect pattern corresponding to the variable display of this time may be determined at a predetermined rate. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part effect is extracted, and depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "jackpot", a prepared operation part effect determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 is referred to. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of operation part effects, ie, whether or not to execute the operation part effects, and the operation part effect pattern to be used when executing the operation part effects. The operation part effect corresponding to the variable display this time becomes executable when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed, and it becomes unexecutable when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. . Therefore, the operating part effect corresponding to this variable display is limited so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operating part effect included in the pre-reading notice effect is executed. There is a limit set.

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed along with the specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach A is executed, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted by determining not to execute the operation part effect at any timing. In this case, within the range of the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect of the SP reach A is executed, a limitation is provided as a limit so that all the operation part effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part performance at a predetermined ratio at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or the establishment of reach, while at the time of development of reach or Execution of the operation part presentation may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation part presentation at the timing corresponding to the winning/failure notification. In this case, within the range of the variable display in which the SP reach A ready-to-reach effect is executed, a limitation is provided so that some operation part effects cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display. . In addition, in the range of variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be provided so that part or all of the operation section effect is difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. Thus, the effect control CPU 120 that determines the operation part effect in step AKS202 can limit the execution of the operation part effect including the vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed.

In the case of determining the operation part effect in step AKS202, when a special effect different from the specific effect is executed based on the variation pattern or the result of determination at the time of winning, more than when the special effect is not executed. A determination ratio of the operation part effects may be set so that part or all of the operation part effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation part effect, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step AKS203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (variable display effect control pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (operation part effect control pattern) corresponding to the operation part effect determined in step AKS202, and sets it as a usage pattern. good. Also, for example, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the variation of the decoration pattern or the like is started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of the variable display, settings are made for updating the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 42-8 shows a configuration example of an effect control pattern. The production control pattern includes a variable display production control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8(A) and an operation unit production control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8(B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8(A) executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. contains control data used to control the The operation part effect control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8(B) includes control data used for controlling the execution of the operation part effect.

The variable display effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value, which is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is preset. In place of the production control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined production control command is received from the main board 11, or a prescribed process is executed as a process for controlling the production operation in the production control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of effect control, etc., may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 . The audio control data includes data indicating the output mode of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects linked to the variable display of decorative patterns. That is, the audio control data is data that designates audio output operations from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the light emission driving mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern for light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that designates the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decoration pattern.

The operation detection control data includes, for example, an effective detection period for effectively detecting a player's operation, such as a tilting operation on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on a trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and each operation. Data indicating the effect operation mode according to the detection of the player's motion, such as data designating the control contents of the effect operation when is effectively detected, is included. The vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decoration pattern. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that designates the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the variation pattern.

It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the production control patterns, but the production control pattern that includes some control data according to the content of the production operation by each production control pattern. There may be Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may differ according to the content of the production operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while other process data includes some of these data. you can Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the production process during variable display in step S172 of the production control process process, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches with any of the production control process timer determination values, and if it matches controls performance operations according to various corresponding control data. Thus, the effect control CPU120, according to the contents of the process data #1 ~ process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, light emitters such as decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) are progressed. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n, voice control data #1 to voice control, which are associated with the performance control process timer determination values #1 to #n Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the performance operation of the performance device. Effect control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n that indicate the contents and specify the execution of effect control are configured.

The operation section effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer determination value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation part effect, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern is data specifying the lighting mode when the operation lever of the stick controller 31B and the push button 31B are to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation part effect. The vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation part effect, such as driving of the vibration motor 131 . That is, the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern is data specifying the vibration mode when vibrating the operation lever of the stick controller 31B and the push button 31B in the vibration effect included in the operation part effect.

FIG. 42-9 shows a setting example of the timing at which the operation section effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the start of the variable display of decorative symbols as the preliminary variation, and are timings at which the operation section presentation at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, depending on the remaining number of times, the operation part effect is executed at some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the advance fluctuation starts. be able to. For example, when the remaining number of times is "3", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT01, and when the remaining number of times is "2", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times is is "1", it is possible to execute the operation section effect at the timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 42-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of decorative symbols to be the target variation, and is the timing at which the operation section effect at the start of the target variation can be executed. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the operation part by the operation part effect pattern according to the remaining number of times in part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the timing of the advance fluctuation start At the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts after the execution of the effect, the operation part effect according to the operation part effect pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times "0" can be executed. Also, at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts, there is a case where the operation part effect can be executed. Specifically, when any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation part effect by the determined operation part effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the target variation start time. be able to.

Timings corresponding to the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be capable of executing the operation section effect at the same time as the variable display of decorative patterns is started. , it may be possible to execute the operation section effect when a certain period of time has passed since the variable display of the decoration pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative design may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative design.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIG. 42-9 are the operation part effects corresponding to the variable display of this time. These are the timings when each can be executed. For example, according to the operation part effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation part effect can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the operation part effect can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. can be executed, and there are cases where the operation section effect can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the success/fail notification. Specifically, in step AKS202, when one of the operation part production patterns AKC21 and AKC22 is determined, at timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part production pattern is executed according to the determined operation part production pattern. can be done. Further, when either of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation part effect by the determined operation part effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the ready-to-win situation develops. Alternatively, when the operation part effect pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation part effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the success/failure notification.

FIG. 42-10 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white shown in FIG. 42-10(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the timings when the pre-variation starts. As shown in FIG. 42-10(B), the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 42-10(A), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the OFF period of the vibration presentation, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished. The light emission effect that changes the light emission color to white according to the ON period of the vibration effect is, for example, a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during an on period of 300 milliseconds. may be alternately repeated to periodically change the luminance of the white light.

FIG. 42-11 shows a control example of the operation part presentation by the operation part presentation patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC02 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red shown in FIG. 42-11(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. It can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the timings when the pre-variation starts. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC03 includes the light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color shown in FIG. 42-11(A) and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 42-11(B). , at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of the pre-variation. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 42-11(B). As shown in FIG. 42-11(A), the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are continuously red in the operation part effect pattern AKC02 in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. If it is the operating section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light with red, reddish purple, bluish purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange transitions according to the elapsed time and the light emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 should emit rainbow colors. As for the light emitting positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, it is possible to specify a plurality of sections, for example, the upper and lower portions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2. All or part of the luminance can be set.

FIG. 42-12 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white shown in FIG. 42-12(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 42-12(B). As shown in FIG. 42-12(A), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to white according to the ON period of the vibration effect is, for example, a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during an on period of 1500 milliseconds. may be alternately repeated to periodically change the luminance of the white light.

FIG. 42-13 shows a control example of the operation part presentation by the operation part presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red shown in FIG. 42-13(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. It can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color shown in FIG. 42-13(A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 42-13(B). , at timing AKT11, which is the time when the target variation starts. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period of 3000 milliseconds continues, as shown in FIG. 42-13(B). As shown in FIG. 42-13(A), the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect is intermittent with the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in red if the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is matched with the ON period of the vibration effect. , and if it is the operating section effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternately repeat a first luminance with a high emission luminance of red and a second luminance with a low emission luminance every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect, thereby emitting red light. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 changes the light emission brightness at a shorter period than the light emission effect included in the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC11. becomes. As described above, as a rendering mode of the lighting rendering, not only the lighting color but also the lighting period may be changed so as to indicate the reliability of the big win. It should be noted that red light may be emitted intermittently by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. As an effect mode of the light emission effect, while the light emission period is common, the light emission color may be made different to indicate the reliability of the big win. In this way, for example, when the luminescent colors in the luminous effects are different, it is sufficient to reduce the burden of controlling the luminous effects by standardizing the luminescence cycle.

FIG. 42-14 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC21 can be executed in response to the effect AKR1 which becomes the effect when the reach is established shown in FIG. 42-14(C) includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes pink and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 42-14(C). The effect AKR1, which is the effect when the reach is established, may be, for example, a effect of displaying a effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image corresponding to the establishment of the reach. In addition, any production associated with establishment of reach may be used. As shown in FIG. 42-14(C), the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which ON periods and OFF periods are alternately repeated multiple times at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 42-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the OFF period of the vibration presentation, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished.

FIG. 42-15 shows a control example of the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to the effect AKR2 which becomes the effect when the ready-to-win state is established shown in FIG. 42-15(C) includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color is orange, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 shown in FIG. 42-15(C). The effect AKR2, which is the effect when ready-to-win is established, may be, for example, a effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image corresponding to the establishment of ready-to-win. In addition, any production associated with establishment of reach may be used. It is sufficient that the effects AKR1 and AKR2, which are effects at the time of establishment of ready-to-win state, have different effects. As shown in FIG. 42-15(C), the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV12 is an ON period of the first vibration ON time (eg 100 milliseconds) and an OFF period of the first vibration OFF time (eg 100 milliseconds). After two alternating repetitions, a vibrating mode comprising an on period of a second vibrating on time (eg, 250 ms) and an on period of a third vibrating on time (eg, 500 ms). As shown in FIG. 42-15(B), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. In the OFF period of the vibration presentation, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned off and extinguished. In addition, when the ON period of the vibration effect is different from the vibration ON time, the light emission pattern of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be changed. For example, during the ON period of the first vibration ON time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit orange light. On the other hand, during the ON periods of the second vibration ON time and the third vibration ON time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light by alternately repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the second vibration ON time and the third vibration ON time. do it.

The operation part effects by the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed corresponding to the effects AKS1 and AKS2 which are the effects when the reach develops at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the luminous effects in which the emission color becomes white. , and a vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation part production pattern AKC31, the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV21 becomes a vibration mode of the ON period corresponding to the production AKS1. In the case of the operation part production pattern AKC32, the vibration production by the vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode of the ON period according to the production AKS2. As for the light emission effect associated with these vibration effects, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect in any of the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32.

The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the win/fail effect at the timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification effect is performed. ,including. The vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the ON period is 1500 milliseconds or longer. In the light emitting effect associated with this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in FIGS. 42-12 and 42-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and when the emission color is red or iridescent, which is different from white, and when the emission color is white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or iridescent. In this case, a vibration effect is executed with a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the luminescent color is white and when the luminescent color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. It should be noted that, in both the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is iridescent, the common vibration pattern AKV03 is used for vibration presentation. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start time of the target variation, include the operation part effects with the operation part effect pattern AKC11, and the execution of the light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect with the vibration pattern AKV02. I'm in. Operation part effects that can be executed at timing AKT13 when reach develops include operation part effects using operation part effects patterns AKC31 and AKC32. contains something In this way, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops become white, which is the common emission color, and the vibration effect are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. Note that the operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start time of the target variation, include the operation part effects that use the operation part effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13, and the lighting effects that make the emission color red or rainbow. there is As in this case, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops are different in the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the vibration effect may also have different vibration modes. As in the case where the light emission color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is different from the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Including what they have in common. Further, as in the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The effects may include different lighting modes. The operation part effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the ready reach develops does not have to include the lighting mode of the light emission effect different from the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.

At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operating part effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing of the winning/failure notification, include the operation part effects with the operation part effect pattern AKC41, such as the operation part effects with the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm in. This operating part presentation has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation part performance executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win is established and the operation part performance performed at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is inflated, the reliability of the big hit is common at 100%, and the vibration performance are different. Further, the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established and the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is inflicted have different emission colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effects. In this way, when the timings for executing the operation part effects are different, the reliability of the big hit is common, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so that the stick controller 31A , and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the amusement of the game.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC11 to AKC13. Includes those that perform lighting effects. At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts and the operation part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the vibration of the vibration effect. A case where the mode is different is provided. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. It is possible to improve the game interest.

At the timing AKT12 when reach is established, the operation part effects that can be executed are the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effects that change the light emission color to pink or orange with the vibration effects of the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops include the operation part effects with the operation part effects patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effects that change the emission color to white with the vibration effects with the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operating part effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operating part effect performed at the timing AKT13 when the ready reach develops, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect. There are different cases. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part production is different, the lighting mode of the lighting production is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration production is different. Appropriate diversification can improve game interest. Note that the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established may include execution of a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes white. Also, the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include execution of a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part production is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission production is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration production is different, so that the production using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be performed. Appropriate diversification can improve game interest.

The jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 which are the timings of the start of the advance fluctuation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation part performance pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT11 which is the target variation start time is any one of 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% according to the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the big hit when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the ready-to-win state is established becomes 100% regardless of the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the jackpot when the operation part performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed is 50% or more regardless of the operation part performance pattern. The reliability of the big hit becomes 100% when the operation part presentation is executed at the timing AKT14 which is the timing of the success/failure notification. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation section effect is executed may differ depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing when the vibration effect is executed. Further, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration presentation includes the duration of the vibration corresponding to the length of the ON period, the vibration intensity by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the ON period and the OFF period, the combination of strong vibration and weak vibration in the vibration intensity, and others. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and other arbitrary vibration patterns for vibrating the operation members.

A plurality of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body motion, image display, music reproduction, big win determination notification, and big win type lotteries CH1 and CH2 in the reach performance of SP reach A. The reach effect of the SP reach A has, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed, the reliability of the big hit becomes higher than when the reach performance of the SP reach A is executed, and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state when it is executed is high. Become. Movable body motion, image display, and music reproduction in the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A are all executed as part of the ready-to-win effect, so they do not individually have the reliability of big hits. Also, the big hit decision notification is an effect for definitely notifying that the variable display result will be a "big hit". The jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2 are jackpot type lottery effects corresponding to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are similar to the reach performance of SP reach A in that the player can recognize without a doubt that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to the jackpot. It is different from the production having a big hit reliability. In this way, among a plurality of specific performances, the reliability of the big win is higher when the vibration performance by the performance of the operating part is executed than when the specific performance is executed with the reliability of the big win. It should be set as follows. Further, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed than when the vibration performance by the operation part performance is not executed.

FIG. 42-16 shows an execution example of an effect by making the game effect lamp 9 emit light. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M and a right frame lamp 9N which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the execution mode of the production by light emission.

In the effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit white light in accordance with the background display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in red by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to red along with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit red light corresponding to the background display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in rainbow colors by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by either the operation part effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes rainbow with the vibration effect.

In effect execution example AKF03, when the background display of image display device 5 changes from black to white from left to right, upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are displayed in the background display. In addition, the control lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF04, when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit blue light corresponding to the character display. , the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated in white by the light emission effect in the operation part effect. For example, the operation part effect by any one of the operation part effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

For example, the background display and character display of the image display device 5, and other predetermined effects by displaying an arbitrary effect image can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display of decorative symbols. In the effect process during variable display executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to perform variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect in accordance with the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. there is During execution of such a predetermined effect, when the operation part effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 to emit light due to the vibration effect in the operation part effect. can emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the control data read from the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the operation part effect. Execution control is performed. The control data includes lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in such an operation part effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation part effect according to the predetermined effect. is. In this way, the operation members such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in different manners. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production by and improve the game interest.

In addition to the screen display of the image display device 5, or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit light in a luminescent color that matches the sound output of BGM, for example, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. Light may be emitted in the light emission color of the light emission effect in the part effect. For example, when the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are caused to emit red light corresponding to the sound output. On the other hand, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be caused to emit white light by the lighting effect in the operation part effect. Even in this way, the operation members such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in different ways. , it is possible to appropriately diversify the production by light emission and improve the game interest. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. may be When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation part effect. By executing the operation section effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect of vibrating the operation member such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

FIG. 42-17 shows a setting example of an effect period in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in accordance with the action of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit blue light accompanying the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed along with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit gold in accordance with the special vibration effect of the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ03 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the color of light emitted from the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B changes from blue through red to gold in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the notification of the determination of the big hit. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ04 includes a specific light emitting effect in which the control lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit rainbow colors in accordance with the special vibration effect of the vibration pattern AKV44. The notification of the confirmation of the big hit includes stopping display of the confirmed decorative pattern which is the display result of the decorative pattern, display of a scene in which the friend character wins the battle with the enemy character in the ready-to-win effect, the speaker 8L, By outputting a notification sound indicating the confirmation of the big win by 8R, lighting the notification lamp of the confirmation of the big win included in the game effect lamp 9, or by combining some or all of these, the player can arbitrarily recognize the big win. It is sufficient if it is a case of executing the notification of.

It should be noted that, following the operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 which is the time of winning/failure notification, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ04 associated with the big hit confirmation notification may be executed. In this case, the impression of the performance can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved by executing the specific interlocking performance accompanying the announcement of the determination of the big win while the expectation of the player is heightened by the performance of the operation part. When the specific interlocking effect is executed following such an operation part effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect is changed between the operation part effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emission effect or the specific light emission effect is changed. The light emission modes may be varied. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission luminance may be different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. To make it possible to easily recognize the distinction between the operation part performance and the specific interlocking performance by making the vibration mode and the light emission mode different to give a sharpness to the performance, to appropriately diversify the performance, and to improve the amusement of the game. can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in association with the jackpot type lotteries CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is a specific light emission in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B emit white light accompanying the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Includes performances. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the emission color of the push button 31B become rainbow colors in accordance with the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes lighting effects.

FIGS. 42-18 to 42-20 show the case where SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIG. 42-18 shows production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body motion is executed in the SP reach A reach production. FIG. 42-19 shows production execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when image display is executed in the SP reach A reach production. FIG. 42-20 shows production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach production.

The position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position when the variable display of the decoration pattern is in the ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position that is in front of the lower end of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Subsequently, when the reach performance of SP reach A is started due to reach development, the movable body motion is performed by changing the position of the movable body 32 from the initial position as in the performance execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position. An effect image showing a message such as “Reach A” is displayed. After that, as the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed, the position of the movable body 32 passes through the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This change is..." is displayed.

Along with the position change of the movable body 32 that becomes the movable body motion as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 42-17. , contains Furthermore, when the position of the movable body 32 continues to change and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the example of execution of the effect AKG03, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode in which the lever or the push button 31B is vibrated during the ON period. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an ON period in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate every 250 milliseconds and an OFF period in which they do not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B emits blue light continuously over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is switched between blue light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (extinguishing) every 250 milliseconds. good too.

When the movable body motion in the reach effect of SP reach A such as the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N, for example, the position of the movable body 32 is changed. The light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the light emission color and light emission brightness gradually change from the lower side to the upper side as the light is emitted. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit blue light when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, and the light emission luminance changes in a wave shape according to height and time. It is sufficient to emit light in such a manner as to

After the movable body motion is completed as in the effect execution example AKG03, the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG11 as the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. At this time, for example, the character display indicating the message "Extremely hot" is displayed in gold color. In addition, as in effect execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the character display and displayed.

Along with the display of the effect image that becomes the image display such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the specific interlocking effect is executed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect that is executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A is, during the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of the effect image in the ready-to-win effect different from the character display is started as in the effect execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ02 ends. Note that, for example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Super hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are vibrated continuously over this period AKZ02. You may perform special vibration production in a mode. Further, during the period AKZ02, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated in a light emitting mode in which a first brightness with a high gold emission brightness and a second brightness with a low emission brightness are alternately repeated every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A such as the effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. The light emission color should be gold in accordance with the image display and the light emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. For example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N emit golden light as the effect image is displayed, which becomes an image display as in the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12. When the display of the effect image is started, light may be emitted in a color different from gold.

After the display of the effect image as in the effect execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the effect execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in the effect execution example AKG22, the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, as in production execution example AKG23, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, by sequentially outputting the sounds of a plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the production, it is sufficient that the entire musical composition can be reproduced in the SP reach A reach production.

Along with the output of the sound for music reproduction, such as the production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking production is executed, and the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effect that is executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A is, during the period AKZ03 shown in FIG. and a specific lighting effect that changes from red to gold. In the effect execution example AKG21, a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH01. In the effect execution example AKG22, a specific light emission effect is executed in which the light emission color becomes red in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH02. In the effect execution example AKG23, a specific light emission effect is executed in which the light emission color becomes gold in response to the sound output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is sufficient to execute a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of a plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 are output in order according to the progress of the effect.

FIG. 42-21 shows a case where the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses as a music reproduction execution example AKH01. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 42-21(A), during the period AKZ03 in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed with the reproduction of the music, Sounds corresponding to the scale are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of do that is output last may be one octave higher than the scale of do that is output first.

Such a specific interlocking effect associated with music playback includes a specific lighting effect in which the light emitting color changes as shown in FIG. and a vibration effect that is a vibration effect, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music reproduction. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 42-21(C) is a vibration mode in which the ON period and the OFF period are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 42-21(B), the specific light emission effect associated with this special vibration effect is performed by lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The color of the emitted light changes in order between blue, red, and gold. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are extinguished during the stop period of the sound output and the OFF period of the special vibration effect. It should be noted that, in the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the lighting mode of the specific lighting effect may be changed for each scale. For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit blue light continuously for a period corresponding to the scale of Do, which is output first. Next, during the period corresponding to the scale of re, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first luminance with a high red emission luminance and a second luminance with a low emission luminance. After that, during the period of the mi scale, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are caused to emit light in a light emission mode that switches between gold light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (extinguishing). In this way, by adopting a light emission mode in which the light emission amount differs for each light emission color corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

The reach effect of SP reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 42-8 (A) is based on lamp control data and vibration control data, and is accompanied by specific effects such as movable body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP reach A. It is set to be able to execute a specific interlocking effect. In the specific interlocking effect, a special vibration effect can be executed by any one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation part effect are different in vibration mode. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration effect in the operation section effect that can be executed regardless of the specific effect and the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect that can be executed in accordance with the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performance using the operation member such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the game interest.

When executing the operation part effect, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are illuminated using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the vibration effect of vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emission effect is executed. When the specific interlocking effect is executed, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are operated using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the special vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. A specific light emission effect that emits light is executed. By executing an effect including vibration and light emission of operation members such as the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can enjoy the image display and the image display. By recognizing the vibration and light emission of different operation members, the unexpectedness of the production is enhanced.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 42-17, with the motion of the movable body 32 which is the movable object motion in the reach performance of SP reach A, the specific interlocking performance including the special vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed. In this way, by executing the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

During the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 42-17, with the announcement of the confirmation of the big hit, the specific interlocking performance including the special vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed. In this way, by being able to execute the special vibration performance in accordance with the notification of the control to the jackpot game state, the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is appropriately diversified, and the game interest is improved. be able to.

The specific interlocking effect includes a specific light emitting effect by emitting light from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 along with the special vibration effect by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. A light emission mode such as a light emission color is different between the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation part effect and the specific light emission effect accompanying the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect. In this way, by differentiating the light emitting mode according to the operation part effect and the specific interlocking effect, the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are appropriately diversified, and the game interest is improved. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 42-10 and 42-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of advance fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, a vibration effect is executed according to the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 42-12 and 42-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. and cases where the emission color is red or iridescent, which is different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the emission color becomes red or iridescent. , the vibration effect is executed by the vibration pattern AKV03. Therefore, the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that is the start of the preliminary fluctuation and the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the start of the target fluctuation. As well as being different, the vibration mode is also different. In addition, the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT01 that is the start time of the preliminary fluctuation and the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the time of the start of the target fluctuation, and the light emission color is white and red. By becoming one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, while the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performance using the member and improve the game interest.

Vibration effects of operation part effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of advance fluctuations, are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start time of target fluctuations, based on the result of winning judgment, which is the result of pre-reading judgment. Executed in the variable presentation prior to the variable presentation to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation part effects are executed, the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the game interest can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 42-10 and 42-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start times of advance fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. , and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, a vibration effect is executed by the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the luminescent color is white and when the luminescent color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. To improve amusement in a game by properly diversifying performances. It should be noted that, in both the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is iridescent, the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration presentation is common between the case where the luminescent color is red and the case where the luminescent color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous effect pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice effect is an operation part effect pattern in which the light emission color in the light emission effect differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than '0' or when the remaining number of times is '0'. There are things that contain For example, the continuous effect pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 42-5(A) includes an operating part effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and an operating part effect pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains The operation part presentation by the operation part presentation pattern AKC01 includes a light emission presentation in which the emission color is white. The operation part effect by the operation part effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 that is the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect that is accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 that is the start of the target fluctuation , the light emission mode is different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different. A game interest can be improved.

In the continuous performance pattern used for executing the continuous advance notice performance, the reliability of the big hit of the operation part performance pattern corresponding to the small number of remaining times is higher than the reliability of the big win of the operation part performance pattern corresponding to the large number of remaining times. is set to prevent it from becoming degraded. For example, in the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 42-5(A), if the operating part effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operating part effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0" , so as to prevent the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. If it is the operation part effect pattern AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part effect pattern AKC11 or the operation part effect pattern AKC12 is assumed as the operation part effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". configured to prevent As a result, even though the operating part performance with high reliability of the big win is executed first at the start of the advance fluctuation, the performance of the operating part with low reliability of the big win is prevented from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 42-10 and 42-11, among the operation section effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the timings when the preliminary fluctuation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is the light emission color. When the light emission color becomes white, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the light emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the ON period and OFF period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-light emission are repeated, and when the light emission color becomes red, light is continuously emitted in accordance with the ON period of the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 42-12 and 42-13, among the operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect is white. When the luminous color is white, it emits light according to the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, and the luminous color changes to red. In this case, light is emitted intermittently according to the ON period of the vibration presentation by the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the setting of the ON period is different between the vibration effects by the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the light emission mode such as the light emission period in the light emission effect is different. Even in this way, it is sufficient if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operating part effect is different.

(Modified example of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
With respect to the operation part effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

With respect to the performance of the operation part, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the reliability of the big win may be changed according to the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko game machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the set values of the pachinko game machine 1, or the pachinko game machine 1. may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, with respect to the operation part effects, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win may be varied according to an arbitrary degree of advantage regarding the game in the pachinko game machine 1, Different ratios may be determined according to such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the reliability of the big win may be changed according to the arbitrary advantage of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, Different ratios may be determined according to such advantages.

When the timing of executing the operation part production is different and common, when the vibration mode of the vibration production is different and common, and when the light emission mode of the light emission production is different and common, the reliability of the big hit is increased. The combination of each case, such as the case of being different and the case of being common, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. When the execution timing is different or common between the operation part production and the specific interlocking production, When the vibration mode of the vibration production and the special vibration production is different and common, When the light emission production and the specific light emission production The combination of each case, such as the case of different cases and the case of being common, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. In addition, when the vibration mode of vibration production|presentation differs, the light emission mode of light emission production|presentation should just be made common, and the control burden of light emission production|presentation can be reduced. When the light emitting modes of the light emitting effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effect can be reduced by standardizing the vibration mode of the vibration effect. When a part of the vibration mode in the vibration performance is different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration performance can be reduced by sharing the other vibration modes in the vibration performance. For example, when vibration intensities in the vibration presentation are different, the vibration period in the vibration presentation may be made common, thereby reducing the control burden of the vibration presentation. When part of the light emission mode in the light emission effect is different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effect can be reduced by standardizing the other light emission modes in the light emission effect. For example, when the luminescent colors in the luminous effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the luminous effect by standardizing the luminescence period in the luminous effect. As for the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, it is sufficient if the control load can be reduced by similar commonality.

In addition to the execution of the variable display, or instead of the execution of the variable display, when it is controlled to an arbitrary game state such as a small winning game state or a big winning game state, an operation part performance or a specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when it is controlled in a small winning game state, a predetermined ratio is determined according to whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the big winning game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. It may be possible to execute the operation section effect with . When it is controlled to the jackpot game state, the presence or absence of time reduction control and probability variable control after the jackpot game state is finished, the end condition, and the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state. Depending on the presence or absence, the amount of increase, or the like, it may be possible to execute the operation section presentation at a predetermined ratio. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking effect along with a specific effect such as movable object operation, image display, and music reproduction in the small winning game state or the big winning game state.

The specific effect that can be executed in the specific interlocking effect may be any effect that can be executed according to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike the ready-to-win effect, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined rate and a suggestive effect is executed to suggest that the game state is controlled to a big win, a specific effect is specified in part or all of the effect period It may be possible to execute an interlocking effect.

It may be possible to execute an operation section effect or a specific interlocked effect when the control is in an arbitrary effect state. For example, when it is controlled to a production state that is a special production mode, the operating part production and specific interlocking production are executed at a higher rate than when it is controlled to a production state that is a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operation member capable of executing the effect by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to be able to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or a sensor that detects a touch operation or a press operation on a touch panel. Also, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. A predetermined camera may be used to photograph the player's hands, etc., and the results may be analyzed (video motion capture) to detect the actions of the player. In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such an action detection member, a contact member that a player can contact with a hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the action detection member or separately from the action detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation part effect can correspond to the vibration effect in the characteristic portion 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the characteristic portion 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation part effects, the vibration effects included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the pre-fluctuation starts can correspond to the first vibration effects in the feature part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation part effects, the vibration effect included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effects included in the operation part effect are the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the characteristic portion 48AK, the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the characteristic portion 50AK. It can correspond to light emission production. Of the light emission effects included in the operation part effects, the light emission effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation part effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at which the preliminary fluctuation starts are the light emission associated with the first vibration effects in the feature part 50AK. Able to handle performances. Among the light-emitting effects included in the operation part effects, the light-emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect included in the operation part effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts is the light-emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. can handle. The special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect can correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic portion 49AK.

In addition, in each characteristic part and modification described above, regarding the transition to the time saving state (high base state), there is a form to shift via the big hit state or small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is always operated. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the time saving state (high base state) is displayed without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 ).

In addition, as the above-described time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be used as part of the winning symbols or may be used as part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing the lottery process related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost pattern and the big hit pattern lottery random numbers, small winning pattern lottery random numbers, big win lottery determination random numbers, fall lottery lottery random numbers, and other random numbers for other lotteries may be used for lottery.

In addition, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small winning symbols or winning symbols. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning symbol to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different probabilities between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing time-saving symbols, even if a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, 2nd starting prize opening) is acceptable.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the lottery of the time-saving design is a small hit design. When a random number is used, a specific small winning pattern random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving design may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the lottery of the time saving pattern is performed using a structure, when the small hit pattern uses the time saving pattern together, the variable display number of the time saving state (time saving number) does not change depending on whether or not the time saving area passes to

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, a specific random number will be the winning value. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Further, the judgment timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be executed at the timing after the big hit judgment. In addition, the time-saving pattern lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of already being in the time saving state, even if the number of times of time saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it is sufficient if it is determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Moreover, when the number of times of time saving differs according to the time saving pattern, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can change the allocation lottery of the time saving pattern.

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, a derivation lottery for time saving end patterns (time saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end patterns are derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the big win patterns are derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

Also, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing of control to the time-saving state is the timing of the completion of the operation of the structures in the game state (for example, small winning state) in which the structures are operated.

In addition, in the case of a game machine controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number-of-times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high-probability low-base state when the amusement center is opened. , and after the high-probability low-base state is executed a specified number of times of variable display and ends, control may be performed to the time-saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 48AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means operable by the player, a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect to emit light, and the rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the vibration effect Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different, and the vibration of the vibration effect is generated according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. The mode is different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to the vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern and the big hit according to the use of the operation part effect pattern. Reliability, etc. may be used. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different depending on the light emission mode of the light effect, for example, if the emission colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, or the like.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode have a common light emission mode of the light emission effect, Vibration modes may differ. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. Aspects may vary. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big hit is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is in the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration performance executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win state and the vibration performance executed at the timing for executing the development performance after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach state. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the vibration effect is executed at the time, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect according to the predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the lighting modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed, and regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the line of sight guidance effect executing means is capable of executing the line of sight at the first timing It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 49AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising an operation means operable by the player and a vibration performance capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance and a special vibration performance as vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. Execution means, light emitting effect executing means capable of executing light emitting effect of causing operation means to emit light according to predetermined vibration effect, and specific effect executing means capable of executing specific effect according to the progress of a game, wherein the predetermined vibration effect is provided. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when is not executed, and the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance and the timing when the predetermined vibration performance is executed The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the state, the vibration performance executing means can execute the special vibration performance along with the execution of the specific performance, and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. Just do it. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The specific effect may be, for example, reach effect of SP reach A, big hit determination notification, big hit type lottery, and the like. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The fact that the ratio of control to the advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed is, for example, based on the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern and the use of the operation part effect pattern. It may be a big hit reliability or the like. The fact that the special vibration effect can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration effect during periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. Vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 may be used for the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, for example.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, or the like.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win state. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between when it is performed in the light emission mode and when the light emission effect is performed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode have a common light emission mode of the light emission effect. Yes, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The different vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big win is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and a predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode may differ in the light emission mode of the light emission performance and in the vibration mode. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing to execute the development effect after the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the time, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting effect according to the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the lighting modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , a predetermined vibration effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the visual guidance effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing , the visual guidance effect may be executed before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the visual guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3 may be performed.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

The ratio of control to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach effect is executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the game interest.

The specific effect executing means can execute the effect of operating the movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effects for moving the movable member may be, for example, the effects execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the amusement of the game.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to notification of being controlled in an advantageous state. Here, the notification of being controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot determination notification or the like. The special vibration effect that accompanies this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the amusement of the game.

The light emitting effect executing means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect of causing the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the special vibration effect, and the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect differ in light emission mode. good too. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The different luminescence mode may be, for example, a case where the luminescence color is white, red, or iridescent, rather than a case where the luminescence color changes from blue, gold, or blue to gold via red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

A limiting means may be provided for limiting the execution of the predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed. Here, the restricting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when determining the operation part effect in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 50AK)
A game machine capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and capable of executing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which an operation means operable by the player and the operation means vibrates. A vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance for causing the operation means to emit light along with the vibration performance are provided, and when the vibration performance is executed, the vibration performance is more effective than when the vibration performance is not executed. The ratio of control to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of control to an advantageous state differs according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the timing of execution between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. are different, the vibration mode is also different, and the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The operating means may be, for example, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration effect may be driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, for example. The second vibration effect may be driving the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation part effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, for example. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203, for example. The fact that the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the pattern of the operation part effect. The difference in the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect may be, for example, the reliability of the big hit according to the light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The difference in the timing of execution between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, pre-variation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The difference in vibration mode between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, vibration pattern AKV01 different from vibration pattern AKV03. The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, for example, when the emission colors included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are white, red, and rainbow colors. etc.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player pay attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the target variation start timing AKT11.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach state. Here, the timing at which the variable display changes to the reach mode may be timing AKT12, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing at which the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing at which the notification effect for informing whether or not the control is to be performed in the advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timings at which the vibration effect can be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the second light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between the case where the first light emission mode is executed and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is red or iridescent. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. They are common, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the vibration pattern AKV02, which is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the fact that the rate of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is common may be, for example, the case where the reliability of the big win is 100%. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode are different in the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the difference in light emission mode may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange colors. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing, thereby improving the game interest.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing to execute the development effect after the variable display changes to the ready-to-reach mode have different vibration modes. good too. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration presentation according to the timing, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine comprises a first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed in the second vibration effect, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may be possible to emit light at Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, or the like. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be display of a background image or a character image, for example. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, the image display device 5 or the like. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation part effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A line-of-sight guidance effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operation means is provided, and the vibration effect execution means performs the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. , the second vibration effect can be executed, regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, the second vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode, and the visual guidance effect execution means is capable of executing the second vibration effect The visual guidance effect may not be executed at the first timing, and the visual guidance effect may be executed at the second timing before the second vibration effect is executed. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L and 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3 and T4. A common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, at timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3. If the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
With such a configuration, the vibration of the operation means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest of the vibration presentation can be sufficiently enhanced.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the prefetch determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage may be, for example, a variable display that is pre-variable.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect associated with the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when it is executed in and when the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode during the second vibration. Here, the first vibration-time light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second mode of light emission during vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or rainbow. The difference in the vibration mode may be, for example, the case of the vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the difference in the light emission mode is, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation part effect pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0". I wish I had.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic portions. Features that are combined in this way or individual features that are not combined may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other features.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 9B1 Lever lamp 9B2 Button lamp 9C Upper frame lamp 9M Left frame lamp 9N Right frame lamp 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 31A Stick controller 31B Push Button 32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU
131 Vibration motor 200 Dispensing device 202 First guiding passage forming part 201 Ball tank forming part 203 First passage forming body 210 Terminal substrate 220 Cover bodies 271A to 271H Hole parts 314, 324, 334 Cover part 340 Ball stop members N1 to N6, 11-16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a starting region;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates;
a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect in accordance with the vibration effect;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiter provided so as to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion and having one end formed in a curved shape in the direction in which the game medium flows down ;
with
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and the vibration effect can be executed based on entry of the game medium into the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents game media that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion from accumulating and the screw member that has dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to fall to the guide passage forming portion. The screw member is configured to be able to stay on the restricting portion, and the screw member can drop out of the screw drop restricting portion from the portion formed in the curved shape,
Depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect executed according to the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images